Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Tektronix TAS465 B02 Oscilloscope Service Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 226

Service Manual

TAS 455 & TAS 465


Analog Oscilloscopes
B020099 and Below
070-8524-02

Warning
The servicing instructions are for use by
qualified personnel only. To avoid personal
injury, do not perform any servicing unless you
are qualified to do so. Refer to the Safety
Summary prior to performing service.

Instrument Serial Numbers


Each instrument manufactured by Tektronix has a serial number on a panel insert or tag, or stamped on the
chassis. The first letter in the serial number designates the country of manufacture. The last five digits of the
serial number are assigned sequentially and are unique to each instrument. Those manufactured in the
United States have six unique digits. The country of manufacture is identified as follows:
B010000
E200000
J300000
H700000

Tektronix, Inc., Beaverton, Oregon, USA


Tektronix United Kingdom, Ltd., London
Sony/Tektronix, Japan
Tektronix Holland, NV, Heerenveen, The Netherlands

Instruments manufactured for Tektronix by external vendors outside the United States are assigned a two digit
alpha code to identify the country of manufacture (e.g., JP for Japan, HK for Hong Kong, IL for Israel, etc.).
Tektronix, Inc., P Box 500, Beaverton, OR 97077
.O.
Printed in U.S.A.
Copyright E Tektronix, Inc.,1993. All rights reserved. Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign
patents, issued and pending. The following are registered trademarks: TEKTRONIX, TEK, TEKPROBE, and
SCOPEMOBILE.

WARRANTY
Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three (3) years from
the date of shipment. If any such product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either will repair
the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty
period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for packaging and
shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid. Tektronix shall
pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service
center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for
products returned to any other locations.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance
and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting from attempts by
personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair damage resulting from
improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; or c) to service a product that has been modified or integrated with
other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX' RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR
REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR
BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS
ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Table of Contents
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

vii

List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xi

Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xiii

Symbols and Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Specific Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xiii
xiv

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvii

Related Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xviii

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Purpose Knob and TOGGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save/Recall Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13

Nominal Traits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

Warranted Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

Performance Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

Typical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

117

Installation and Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23

Selecting and Deselecting Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Using the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using AUTOSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compensating the Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23
23
24
24
25
28

Specifications

Operation

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

Table of Contents

Theory of Operation
Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31

Logic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attenuators A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Probe Coding Interface A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Acquisition Hybrid A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Trigger A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor Subsystem A5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROM/RAM Subsystem A5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Readout Subsystem A5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FrontPanel Interface Subsystem A5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Board Interface Subsystem A5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical Output A3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal Output A3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Voltage A3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Switches A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FPP Pots and Probes A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEDs and Driver A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switches A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31
31
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
35
35
35
35
36
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
37
38
38
38

General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41

Using the Brief Performance Checks Procedures . . . . . . . . . . .


Using the Performance Tests Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41
41
42

Brief Performance Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

43

PowerOn Self Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Functional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional Tests Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the Probe Compensator Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the Alt/Chop and Add Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the Time Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the Trigger System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the External Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

43
43
44
44
45
46
46
47
49

Performance Verification

ii

Contents

Table of Contents

Temperature Compensation Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Horizontal Sweep Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

49
49
411

Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

413

Performance Tests Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check DC Gain and Voltage Measurement Accuracy . . . . . .
Check Trigger Level Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check DC Coupling Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check XAxis Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Time Base and Time Cursor Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Dual Delay Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Trigger Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Trigger Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

413
413
415
415
416
417
419
419
419
422
424
424
428

Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

51

Requirements for Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access to Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WarmUp Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing the Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Complete Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Partial Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustment Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustment Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Adjustment
(New Style Power Supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRT Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Frequency Output Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory Horizontal Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory Vertical Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Frequency Step Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attenuator Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical Gain Adjust (Cabinet On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

51
51
51
51
52
52
53
53
53
54

Adjustment

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

54
54
56
57
511
514
516
517

iii

Table of Contents

Maintenance
Maintenance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tektronix Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warranty Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repair or Calibration Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventing ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

61
61
61
62
62
62

Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

65

General Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Procedure Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Procedure Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the CRT Implosion Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

65
65
66
66
67
67

Removal and Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

69

Preparation Please Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Cable Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Cord and Line Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FrontPanel Knobs and Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing FrontPanel Knobs and Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing FrontPanel Knobs and Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feet, Rear Cover, and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the Front Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FrontPanel Trim, Menu and Power Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Front Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Buttons and Elastomer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Button Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Front Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A62 Front Panel Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FrontPanel Module Disassembly/Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Flex Circuit Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A1 Analog Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Driver Board (A3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRT Implosion Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan and Fan Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan and Fan Mount Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan and Fan Mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

iv

61

69
69
610
610
614
614
615
615
615
616
617
618
618
618
618
618
619
619
619
620
621
623
624
626
627
629
629
631

Contents

Table of Contents

CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRT Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRT Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRT Light Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRT Front Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A2 Display Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A63 Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

631
631
633
634
635
636
637
637
638

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

641

Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symptom Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

641
641
642

Repackaging Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

651

Options A1-A5: International Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


WarrantyPlus Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 3R: Rackmount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 02: Front Cover and Pouch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 23: Additional Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 9C: Certificate of Calibration and Test Data Report . .

71
71
71
72
72
72

Options

Replaceable Electrical Parts List


Diagrams
Diagrams and Circuit Board Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

91

Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphic Items and Special Symbols Used in This Manual . . .
Component Locator Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

91
91
91
92

Replaceable Mechanical Parts List

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

Table of Contents

vi

Contents

List of Figures
Figure 21:Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 22:Fuse Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 23:POWER Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 24:Probe Compensation Signal Displayed after AUTOSET .
Figure 25:Connections for Compensating a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 26:How Probe Compensation Affects Signals . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 27:Location of Probe Head Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 28:Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21
22
22
25
25
27
27
28

Figure 31:Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32

Figure 41:Graticule References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Figure 42:Test Hookup for Functional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 43:Horizontal Adjustments (One) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 44:Horizontal Adjustments (Two) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 45:Horizontal Adjustments (Three) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 46:Gain and Voltage Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 47:Trigger Level Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 48:Bandwidth Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 49:XAxis Gain Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 410:Timing Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 411:Dual Delay Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 412:Trigger Sensitivity Test Setup (One) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 413:Trigger Sensitivity Test Setup (Two) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 414:Trigger Sensitivity Test Setup (Three) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 415:Trigger Sensitivity Test Setup (Four) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 416:Video Trigger Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

42
44
410
410
411
415
417
418
419
420
423
425
426
427
427
429

Figure 51:Location of Boards for Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Figure 52:CRT Adjustments Calibration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 53:Low Frequency Output Compensation Calibration
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 54:Horizontal Adjustments (One) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 55:Horizontal Adjustments (Two) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 56:Horizontal Adjustments (Three) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 57:Horizontal Output Calibration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 58:Factory Vertical Calibration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 59:External Trigger Calibration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 510:Vertical Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 511:Adjusting Vertical Gain and Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

52
55

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

56
58
59
59
510
512
513
513
514

vii

List of Figures

Figure 512:High Frequency Step Response Test Setup . . . . . . . . . .


Figure 513:Attenuator Compensation Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 514:Display Driver Board Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 515:Analog Board Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 516:Power Supply Adjustment Location
(New Power Supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 517:Location of J205 (CAL-DIS) on the CPU Board . . . . . .

521
522

Figure 61:Oscilloscope Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Figure 62:Cabinet and FrontPanel Mounted Modules . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 63:Internal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 64:Cables and Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 65:Line Fuse and Line Cord Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 66:Knob and Shaft Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 67:Rear Cover, Cabinet, and Feet Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 68:Trim Ring and Menu Buttons Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 69:A62 Front Panel Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 610:Disassembly of FrontPanel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 611:FrontPanel Ground Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 612:Menu Flex Circuit Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 613:A1 Analog Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 614:Location of Display Driver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 615:CRT Implosion Shield Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 616:Fan Mount Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 617:Fan and Fan Mount Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 618:CRT Rear Bracket and Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 619:CRT Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 620:Removing the CRT front bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 621:Removing the Display Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 622:Power Button Shaft Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 623:Power Supply Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 624:A5 CPU Board Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 625:A1 Analog Board Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . .
Figure 626:A3 Display Driver Board Troubleshooting Procedure . .
Figure 627:A62 Front Panel module Troubleshooting Procedure . .
Figure 628:A2 Display Control Board Troubleshooting Procedure .

610
612
613
614
615
616
617
620
621
622
623
624
626
627
628
630
630
632
634
636
637
638
639
644
645
647
649
650

Figure 91:Graphic Items and Special Symbols Used in This


Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 92:Circuit Board Component Locator Diagram Key . . . . . . .
Figure 93:Semiconductor Lead Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 94:Locating Components on Circuit Board or Schematic
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

viii

515
516
519
520

92
92
93
94

Contents

Figure 95:A1 Analog Board


TAS455: SNB010100 and Above
TAS465: SNB010100 to B012541 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 96:A1 Analog Board
TAS465: SN B012542 and Above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 97:A2 Display Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 98:A3 Display Driver Board
TAS455: SNB010100 and Above
TAS465: SNB010100 to B012561 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 99:A3 Display Driver Board
TAS465: SNB012562 and Above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 910:A4 Front Panel Board
TAS455: SNB010100 and Above
TAS465: SNB010100 to B012835 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 911:A4 Front Panel Board
TAS465: SNB012836 and Above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 912:A5 Processor Board
TAS 455: SNB010100 to B011862
TAS 465: SNB010100 to B011621 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 913:A5 Processor Board
TAS 455: SNB011863 and Above
TAS 465: SNB011622 to B013240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 914:A5 Processor Board
TAS465: SNB013241 and Above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 101:Cabinet and Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 102:Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 103:Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 104:Circuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 105:Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

97
99
911
913
915
917
919
921
923
925
105
107
1012
1014
1015

ix

List of Figures

Contents

List of Tables
Table11:Nominal Traits Vertical Deflection System . . . . . . . . . . .
Table12:Nominal Traits Time Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table13:Nominal Traits Triggering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table14:Nominal Traits Video Triggering System . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table15:Nominal Traits Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table16:Nominal Traits XY Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table17:Nominal Traits Setup Memory Characteristics . . . . . . .
Table18:Nominal Traits Power Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table19:Nominal Traits Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table110:Warranted Characteristics Vertical Deflection
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table111:Warranted Characteristics Time Base System . . . . . .
Table112:Warranted Characteristics Triggering System . . . . . .
Table113:Warranted Characteristics Video Triggering . . . . . . . .
Table114:Warranted Characteristics Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table115:Warranted Characteristics XY Operation . . . . . . . . . . .
Table116:Warranted Characteristics Power Requirements . . . .
Table117:Warranted Characteristics Environmental and Safety
Table118:Typical Characteristics Vertical Deflection System . . .
Table119:Typical Characteristics Time Base System . . . . . . . . .
Table120:Typical Characteristics Triggering System . . . . . . . . .
Table121:Typical Characteristics Video Triggering System . . . .
Table122:Typical Characteristics ZAxis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table123:Typical Characteristics Probe Compensator . . . . . . . .
Table124:Typical Characteristics Setup Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19
111
112
113
113
114
114
114
117
117
118
119
119
119
120

Table41:Required Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Table42:DC Gain and Delta Volts Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table43:DC Coupled Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table44:Time Base and Cursor Accuracies (Mag Off) . . . . . . . . . . .
Table45:Time Base Accuracy (Mag On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table46:500 ms Dual Delay Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

414
416
418
420
422
424

Table51:Adjustments and Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

53

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

15
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18

xi

List of Tables

Table61:Relative Susceptibility to StaticDischarge Damage . . . . .


Table62:External Inspection Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table63:Tools Required for Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table64:Equipment Required for Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table65:Symptom Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table71:International Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xii

63
66
611
641
642
71

Contents

Safety Summary
Please take a moment to review these safety precautions. They are provided
for your protection and to prevent damage to the oscilloscope. This safety
information applies to all operators and service personnel.

Symbols and Terms

These two terms appear in manuals:


H

statements identify conditions or practices that could result in


damage to the equipment or other property.

statements identify conditions or practices that could result in


personal injury or loss of life.

These two terms appear on equipment:


H

CAUTION indicates a personal injury hazard not immediately accessible


as one reads the marking, or a hazard to property including the equip
ment itself.

DANGER indicates a personal injury hazard immediately accessible as


one reads the marking.

This symbol appears in manuals:

StaticSensitive Devices

These symbols appear on equipment:

DANGER
High Voltage

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

Protective
ground (earth)
terminal

ATTENTION
Refer to
manual

xiii

Safety Summary

Specific Precautions

Observe all of the following precautions to ensure your personal safety and
to prevent damage to either the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes
or equipment connected to them.

Do Not Perform Service While Alone


Do not perform internal service or adjustment of this product unless another
person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present.

Use Care When Servicing With Power On


Dangerous voltages exist at several points in this product. To avoid personal
injury, do not touch exposed connections or components while power is on.
Disconnect power before removing protective panels, soldering, or replacing
components.

Power Source
The TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes are intended to operate
from a power source that will not apply more than 250 VRMS between the
supply conductors or between either supply conductor and ground. A pro
tective ground connection, through the grounding conductor in the power
cord, is essential for safe system operation.

Grounding the Oscilloscope


The TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes are grounded through the
power cord. To avoid electric shock, plug the power cord into a properly
wired receptacle where earth ground has been verified by a qualified service
person. Do this before making connections to the input or output terminals of
the oscilloscope.
Without the protective ground connection, all parts of the TAS 455 and
TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes are potential shock hazards. This includes
knobs and controls that may appear to be insulators.

Use the Proper Power Cord


Use only the power cord and connector specified for your product. Use only
a power cord that is in good condition.

Use the Proper Fuse


To avoid fire hazard, use only the fuse specified in the parts list for your
product. It must be identical in type, voltage rating, and current rating.

xiv

Safety

Safety Summary

Do Not Remove Covers or Panels


To avoid personal injury, do not operate the TAS 455 or TAS 465 Oscillo
scope without the panels or covers.

Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmospheres


The TAS 455 or TAS 465 Oscilloscope provide no explosion protection from
static discharges or arcing components. Do not operate the TAS 455 or
TAS 465 Oscilloscope in an atmosphere of explosive gasses.

Electric Overload
Never apply a voltage to a connector on the TAS 455 or TAS 465 Oscillo
scope that is outside the range specified for that connector.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

xv

Safety Summary

xvi

Safety

Preface
This is the Service Manual for the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscillo
scopes. This manual provides you with both service and limited operation
information.
Use the Introduction section to learn what the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog
Oscilloscopes can do and about the available options and accessories.
Use the Operation section to learn about applying power. This section also
contains brief examples of how to use the controls.
Use the Specifications section as a reference for all nominal, warranted, and
typical characteristics for the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes.
Use the Theory section to help you understand the operation of the oscillo
scope to the block level.
Use the Performance Verification section to verify the functionality and war
ranted characteristics of the oscilloscope.
Use the Adjustment section to bring the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscil
loscopes into conformance with the warranted characteristics listed in the
Specifications section. You should adjust the oscilloscope if indicated by the
Performance Verification procedures.
Use the Maintenance section to learn how to perform general maintenance
of your product. Procedures to disassemble and troubleshoot the oscillo
scope are also located in this section.
Use the Replaceable Electrical Parts List section for a list of the electrical
parts.
Use the Diagrams section for troubleshooting the oscilloscope. This section
contains board dollies, block diagrams and schematics for each board.
Use the Replaceable Mechanical Parts List section for a list of the mechani
cal parts.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

xvii

Preface

Related Manuals

Other documentation for the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes
include:
H
H

The Instruction manual (Tektronix part number 0708523XX) contains


detailed operating information and limited service information.

xviii

The Reference (Tektronix part number 0708522XX) gives you a quick


overview of how to operate your TAS 400 Series Analog Oscilloscopes.

The XYZs of Analog and Digital Oscilloscopes (Tektronix part number


0708690XX) provides you with a basic understanding of oscilloscopes
and their use.

Preface

Product Description

Your Tektronix TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes are superb
tools for processing and displaying electrical signals. Their performance
addresses the needs of both benchtop and portable applications with the
following features:
H

60 MHz minimum bandwidth (TAS 455)


100 MHz minimum bandwidth (TAS 465)

Twochannel input

Complete cursor measurement system


H

Voltage

Time

Frequency

Delayed time base

AUTOSET feature

Front panel setup memory

External trigger input

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

11

Product Description

The features of the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes are briefly
described here to help get you acquainted with the operating systems.

User Interface

This oscilloscope uses a combination of frontpanel buttons, knobs, and


onscreen menus to control its many functions. The frontpanel controls are
grouped according to function: vertical, horizontal, trigger, and special.
Within each group, any function adjusted often, such as vertical positioning
or the time base setting, is set directly by its own frontpanel control.

AUTOSET
The AUTOSET button provides you with a usable, triggered display of a
signal applied to an input channel. Many instrument controls and menus are
set to a predefined state, providing you with a known starting point for your
measurements.

Menus
Those functions for which control settings changed less often, such as
vertical coupling and trigger mode, are set indirectly. That is, pressing a
frontpanel button, such as VERTICAL MENU, displays a menu of functions
at the bottom of the screen related to that button. (For the button VERTICAL
MENU, the menu displayed contains functions such as coupling and band
width.) The buttons below this main menu select a function, such as cou
pling and displays a sub menu of settings for that function, such as DC, AC,
or GND, at the right side of the screen. The buttons to the right of the menu
select a setting, such as DC.

General Purpose Knob and TOGGLE


Some menus assign the General Purpose Knob to a selected adjustment.
The method employed is the same as for selecting a function, except the
final selection in the side menu causes the General Purpose Knob to adjust
some function, such as the position of measurement cursors on screen.
Pressing the CLEAR MENU button clears the assignment of the General
Purpose Knob except when assigned to adjust cursors or delay time.
The TOGGLE button works in conjunction with the General Purpose Knob
when positioning cursors. Each press of the TOGGLE button switches
which cursor is active, and therefore controlled by the General Purpose
Knob.

Save/Recall Setups
You can store up to four complete front panel setups in memory. Once you
complete a complex setup and then save it in one of the four memory loca
tions, you can retrieve it at any time. Saved front panel settings do not
include the assignment of the General Purpose Knob.

12

Specifications

Product Description

Vertical System

The vertical system provides two vertical channels with calibrated vertical
scale factors from 2 mV to 5 V per division.
Both channels can be displayed, vertically positioned, bandwidth limited (to
either Full or 20 MHz), inverted, and vertical coupling specified.
Besides the two channels, a math waveform is available for display. (A math
waveform results when you add the two channels.)

Horizontal System

There are three horizontal display modes: main, delayed, and XY.
The main display is the standard horizontal display mode with calibrated
sec/div scales.
The delayed display can be delayed by time with respect to the main trigger.
The delayed display can also be set to display at the first valid trigger after
the delay. The delayed display also has a calibrated sec/div scale.
XY mode is useful to measure the phase difference of two signals.

Trigger System

The triggering system comprises a complete set of features for triggering the
horizontal system. You can configure trigger for source, slope, coupling,
mode, and holdoff. Video triggers are available for triggering on video sig
nals.
You can adjust the trigger level or automatically set it to 50% of the trigger
signal with the press of a button.

Measurement
Cursors

Once you have set up to take your measurements, the cursors can help you
take those measurements quickly.
The TAS 455 and TAS 465 Oscilloscopes have two types of cursors for
taking measurements on the displayed waveforms: delta (difference) and
absolute. The General Purpose Knob controls the placement of the cursors.
The TOGGLE button selects which cursor is active.
Delta voltage measures the voltage between the horizontal bar cursors.
Delta time measures the time between vertical bar cursors. These are delta
measurements; that is, measurements based on the difference between two
cursors.
Absolute voltage measures the voltage position of a single horizontal bar
cursor. The displayed voltage level readout is made with respect to the
ground reference level of the channel.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

13

Product Description

The bar cursors remain displayed even if you change the function of the
General Purpose Knob. This allows you to use them as reference points or
markers to easily identify if measurement signals remain within the parame
ters set by the cursors. Remove the cursor display by turning the cursor
measurement off.

14

Specifications

Nominal Traits
This subsection contains a collection of tables that list the various nominal
traits that describe the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes.
Included are electrical and mechanical traits.
Nominal traits are described using simple statements of fact such as Two,
both identical" for the trait Number of Input Channels," rather than in terms
of limits that are performance requirements.
Table11:Nominal Traits Vertical Deflection System
Name

Description

Number of Input Channels

Two, both identical, called CH 1 and CH 2.

Input Coupling

DC, AC, or GND.


GND input coupling disconnects the input connector from the atten
uator and connects a ground reference to the input of the attenua
tor.

Sensitivity Range

2 mV/div to 5 V/div.
The sensitivity ranges from 2 mV/div to 5 V/div in a 1-2-5 se
quence.

Trace Separation Control Range

w4 divisions.

Bandwidth Selections

20 MHz and FULL, selected independently for each channel.

TAS 455 Rise Time

v5.8 ns.
Nominal rise times are calculated from the following formula:
Rise Time (ns) +

TAS 465 Rise Time

350
BW (MHz)

v3.5 ns.
Nominal rise times are calculated from the following formula:
Rise Time (ns) +

350
BW (MHz)

Vertical Position Range

w10 divisions from graticule center.

TekProbe Interface

Detects 1X, 10X, and 100X attenuator probes.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

15

Nominal Traits

Table12:Nominal Traits Time Base System


Name

Description

Main Seconds/Division Range

20 ns/div to 0.5 s/div.


The seconds/division ranges from 20 ns/div to 0.5 s/div in a 1-2-5
sequence of settings. The X10 magnifier extends the maximum
sweep speed to 2 ns/div.

Delayed Seconds/Division Range

20 ns/div to 5 ms/div.
The seconds/division ranges from 20 ns/div to 5 ms/div in a 1-2-5
sequence of settings. The X10 magnifier extends the maximum
sweep speed to 2 ns/div.

Sweep Length

>10 divisions.

Delay Control Range

0.15 division to 10 times the Main seconds/division setting. The


maximum value can not exceed the end of the Main sweep.

Delta Time Control Range

0 to 10 divisions to the right of setting of the delay control, but maxi


mum value does not exceed end of the Main sweep.

Table13:Nominal Traits Triggering System


Name

Description

Trigger Level or Threshold Ranges

The ranges are as follows:


Source

Range

Internal

15 divisions from center of screen


with ground at center graticule.

External 1X

1.5 V.

External 10X

15 V.

Line

400 V.

Table14:Nominal Traits Video Triggering System


Name

Description

Slope Selection

Slope selection must match the polarity of the sync (i.e., for nega
tive going sync, negative slope must be selected).
A default slope selection for TV trigger modes can be entered in
the scope configuration menu.

16

Specifications

Nominal Traits

Table15:Nominal Traits Cursors


Name

Description

Cursor Functions

DTime, 1/DTime, Absolute Volts, DVolts, Track Trig Level, Ground.

Table16:Nominal Traits XY Operation


Name

Description

Sensitivity Range

Same as Vertical Deflection System.


Volts/div variables in calibrated settings.

Table17:Nominal Traits Setup Memory Characteristics


Name

Description

Nonvolatile Setup Memory

4 Setups.

Table18:Nominal Traits Power Fuse


Name

Description

Fuse Rating

Either of two fuses may be used. Fuse types are as follows:


Voltage Range

Fuse (250 V)
IEC 127
(5  20 mm)

90 132 VAC

3 A Fast.

3.15 A Fast.

180 250 VAC

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

Fuse (250 V)
UL 198.6
(5  20 mm)

3 A Fast.

1.5 A Fast.

17

Nominal Traits

Table19:Nominal Traits Mechanical


Name

Description

Weight

Weights that follow are nominal:


H
H

9.3 kg (20.5 lbs.), with front cover, accessories and accessories


pouch installed.

H
Overall Dimensions

7.7 kg (17 lbs.), standalone instrument.

13.6 kg (30 lbs.), when packaged for domestic shipment.

Dimensions that follow are nominal:


Height:
H

191 mm (7.5 in.), when feet and accessories pouch are in


stalled.

165 mm (6.5 in.), without the accessories pouch installed.

Width:
H

362 mm (14.25 in.), with handle.

Depth:
H

471 mm (18.55 in.), standalone instrument.

490 mm (19.28 in.), with optional front cover installed.

564 mm (22.20 in.), with fully handle extended.

Cooling Method

Forcedair circulation with no air filter.

Finish Type

Tektronix Blue textured paint finish on an aluminum cabinet.

Construction Material

Chassis parts constructed of aluminum alloy; front panel con


structed of plastic laminate; circuit boards constructed of glasslami
nate. Tektronix Blue textured paint finish on an aluminum cabinet.
Plastic parts are polycarbonate.

Weight of rackmounted instrument and


the rackmount conversion kit

Weights that follow are nominal:


4.5 kg (10 lbs.), for the rackmount conversion kit only; 7.9 kg
(17.5 lbs.), when kit is packaged for domestic shipping.

7.3 kg (16 lbs.) plus weight of rackmount Parts, for the rack
mounted instrument (option 3R).

H
Overall Dimensions of the rackmount
instrument

15.4 kg (34 lbs.), when the rackmounted instrument is pack


aged for domestic shipment (no manuals tray).

Dimensions that follow are nominal:


Height: 178 mm (7 in.).

Width: 483 mm (19 in.).

18

Depth: 472 mm (18.6 in.).


Including handles: 517 mm (20.35 in.).

Specifications

Warranted Characteristics
This subsection lists the various warranted characteristics that describe the
TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes. Included are electrical and
environmental characteristics.
Warranted characteristics are described in terms of quantifiable performance
limits which are warranted. This subsection lists only warranted
characteristics. A list of typical characteristics starts on page 117.

NOTE
In these tables, those warranted characteristics that are checked in
the Performance Verification procedure, found in Section 4, appear
in boldface type under the column Name.

Performance
Conditions

The electrical characteristics found in these tables of warranted characteris


tics apply under the following conditions:
H

The oscilloscope has been adjusted at an ambient temperature between


+20_ C and +30_ C

A warmup period of at least 20 minutes has occured

The operating temperature is between -10_ C and +55_ C (unless


otherwise noted)

The Temperature Compensation Calibrations (signal path compensa


tion) have been performed

Table110:Warranted Characteristics Vertical Deflection System


Name

Description

Input Impedance, DC Coupled

1 MW 1% in parallel with 20 pF 2.0 pF.

Variable Range

Increases deflection factor by w2.5:1.

DC Gain Accuracy

The limits are as follows:


Condition
+15_ C to +35_ C

2.5% over the center 5 divi


sions after signal path compen
sation.

-10_ C to +15_ C and


+35_ C to +55_ C

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

Accuracy

3.5% over the center 5 divi


sions after signal path compen
sation.

19

Warranted Characteristics

Table110:Warranted Characteristics Vertical Deflection System (Cont.)


Name

Description

TAS 455 Bandwidth at the BNC input


and probe tip, using the StandardAc
cessory Probe

60 MHz.

TAS 465 Bandwidth at the BNC input

100 MHz.

TAS 465 Bandwidth at the probe tip,


StandardAccessory
using the Standard Accessory Probe

The limits are as follows:


Bandwidth

+15_ C to +35_ C

100 MHz.

-10_ C to +15_ C and


+35_ C to +55_ C
Lower Frequency Limit, AC Coupled

Condition

90 MHz.

v10 Hz with 1X probe.


The AC Coupled Lower Frequency Limits are reduced by a factor of
10 when 10X, passive probes are used.

TAS 455 Crosstalk (Channel Isolation)

w50 dB at 10 MHz, w35 dB at 60 MHz.

TAS 465 Crosstalk (Channel Isolation)

w50 dB at 10 MHz, w35 dB at 100 MHz.

Delay Between Channels, Full Band


width

v200 ps between channels 1 and 2 for equal volts/div and coupling


settings.

Commonmode Rejection Ratio


(CMRR)

w10:1 at v50 MHz.

Trace Shift

The limits are as follows:


Condition

Allowable Trace Shift

Changing volts/div settings

<(0.1 division + 0.2 mV).

Selecting invert

v0.5 division.

Changing from bandwidth limit


to full bandwidth

v0.1 division.

Maximum Input Voltage

400 V (DC + peak AC); derate at 20 dB/decade from 100 kHz to


13 V at 3 MHz.

Low Frequency Linearity

Within 5%.

110

Specifications

Warranted Characteristics

Table111:Warranted Characteristics Time Base System


Name

Description

Time Base Accuracy, Magnify Off

The limits are as follows:


Conditions

Time Measurement Accuracy

+15_ C to + 35_ C

2%.

-10_ C to + 15_ C and


+35_ C to + 55_ C

3%.

Sweep accuracy applies over the center eight divisions. Excludes


the greater of either the first 1@4 division or 25 ns from the sweep start
of the magnified sweep and anything beyond the 100th magnified
division.
Time Base Accuracy, Magnify On

The limits are as follows:


Conditions

Time Measurement Accuracy

10_ C to + 55_ C
Excluding 5 ns/div and
2 ns/div

4%.

+15_ C to + 35_ C
5 ns/div and 2 ns/div

3%.

-10_ C to + 15_ C and


+35_ C to + 55_ C
5 ns/div and 2 ns/div

5%.

Sweep accuracy applies over the center eight divisions. Excludes


the greater of either the first 1@4 division or 25 ns from the sweep start
of the magnified sweep and anything beyond the 100th magnified
division.
Horizontal Position Control Range

The position control is able to move the start of the sweep to the
right of the center vertical graticule and able to move a time mark
corresponding to the tenth division on an unmagnified sweep to the
left of the graticule center.

Variable Control Range

Continuously variable between calibrated seconds/division settings.


Extends both the Main and Delayed sweep seconds/division set
tings by a factor of 2.5 times.

Delay Accuracy, Main Sweep Trigger


Point to Start of Delayed Sweep

(0.5% of reading + 5% of 1 division of the Main sweep + 25 ns).

Delta Delay Accuracy

(0.5% of reading + 5% of 1 division of the Main sweep + 10 ns).

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

111

Warranted Characteristics

Table112:Warranted Characteristics Triggering System


Name

Description

TAS 465 EdgeType Trigger


Sensitivity, DC C
S
iti it
Coupled
l d

The limits are as follows:


Sensitivity

Internal, Any Channel

0.30 division from DC to


25MHz, increasing to 1 div at
150 MHz.

External X1

35 mV from DC to 25 MHz, in
creasing to 100 mV at
150 MHz.

External X10
TAS 455 EdgeType Trigger
Sensitivity,
Sensitivity DC Coupled

Trigger Source

350 mV from DC to 25 MHz,


increasing to 1 V at 150 MHz.

The limits are as follows:


Sensitivity

Internal, Any Channel

0.30 division from DC to


25MHz, increasing to 1 div at
100 MHz.

External X1

35 mV from DC to 25 MHz, in
creasing to 100 mV at
100 MHz.

External X10
Trigger Level or Threshold Accuracy

Trigger Source

350 mV from DC to 25 MHz,


increasing to 1 V at 100 MHz.

The limits are as follows for signals having rise and fall
times w20 ns:
Coupling

Source

Accuracy

DC

All except
Line and
External

(5% of reading + 0.4 division


+ 1 mV)

External (X1)

(5% of reading + 40 mV)

External (X10)

(5% of reading + 400 mV)

All except Line


and External

(5% of reading + 1.1 division


+ 1 mV)

External (X1)

(5% of reading + 110 mV)

External (X10)

(5% of reading + 1.1 V)

All except Line


and External

(5% of reading + 0.35 division


+ 1 mV)

External (X1)

(5% of reading + 35 mV)

External (X10)

(5% of reading + 350 mV)

Noise Reject

HF Reject

112

Specifications

Warranted Characteristics

Table112:Warranted Characteristics Triggering System (Cont.)


Name

Description

Delay Difference Between Ext Input and


Any Channel

<2 ns.

External Trigger Input Impedance

1 MW 2% in parallel with 20 pF 2.0 pF.

Maximum Input Voltage

400 V (DC + peak AC); derate at 20 dB/decade from 100 kHz to


13 V at 3 MHz.

Table113:Warranted Characteristics Video Triggering


Name

Description

Sensitivity

0.75 divisions of composite sync will achieve a stable display.

60 Hz Rejection

Stable video trigger with up to 4 divisions of 60 Hz on the video


signal.

Sync Offset

Stable video trigger if sync tip is 15 divisions, referenced to input


ground.

Sync Separation

Stable trigger on positive or negative composite horizontal sync


(lines) video, for all 525/60 and 625/50 video systems which include:
NTSC, PAL, and SECAM.

Field Interval

Stable trigger on vertical sync interval >20 ms.

Table114:Warranted Characteristics Cursors


Name

Description

DTime Cursor to Signal Accuracy

Same as Time Base Accuracy + 0.1 division.

1/DTime Accuracy

Readouts calculated using DTime cursor difference.

Absolute Volts Accuracy

Accuracies are as follows:


Condition
-10_ C to +30_ C

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

(1% of reading + 2% of one vertical


division + HF display errors + 0.5 mV +
trace shift errors).

+30_ C to +55_ C

DVolts Cursor to Signal Accuracy

Accuracy

(1% of reading + 2% of one vertical


division + HF display errors + 4 mV +
trace shift errors).

(1.6% of reading + 2% of one vertical division + HF display


errors).

113

Warranted Characteristics

Table115:Warranted Characteristics XY Operation


Name

Description

XY Accuracy

4%.

X Bandwidth

DC to at least 3 MHz.

Phase Difference Between X and Y


Amplifiers

3_, DC to 150 kHz.

Table116:Warranted Characteristics Power Requirements


Name

Description

Source Voltage and Frequency

90-132 VACRMS continuous range for 48 through 440 Hz.


180-250 VACRMS continuous range for 48 through 440 Hz.

Power Consumption

v85 watts (150 VA).

Table117:Warranted Characteristics Environmental and Safety


Name

Description

Third Party Certifications

This product shall conform to and be certified where appropriate


according to the following requirements:
Certification
Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)

Listed or Recognized
Component, Electrical and
Electronic Measuring and Testing
Equipment UL 1244.

Canadian Standards CSA


Association (CSA)

Category Certified Electronic


Development and Test
Equipment, CSA 22.2 no. 231.

SelfCertification International
ElectroTechnical Commission
(IEC)

Selfcertified by Tektronix to
comply with IEC 348
recommendation.

Temperature: Operating and


Nonoperating

Operating: -10_ C to +55_ C.


Nonoperating: -51_ C to +71_ C.

Humidity: Operating and Nonoperating

To 95% relative humidity at or below +40_ C to 75% relative


humidity form +41_ C to +55_ C.
A more sever test than stated in MIL-T-28800E, para. 4.5.5.1.1.2.

Altitude: Operating and Nonoperating

Operating: To 4572 m (15,000 ft.).


Nonoperating: To 12192 m (40,000 ft.).

Random Vibration: Nonoperating

2.46 gRMS, from 5 to 500 Hz, 10 minutes each axis.

114

Specifications

Warranted Characteristics

Table117:Warranted Characteristics Environmental and Safety (Cont.)


Name

Description

Random Vibration: Operating

0.31 gRMS, from 5 to 500 Hz, 10 minutes each axis.

Emissions

The instrument meets or exceeds the EMC requirements of the


following standards:
H
H

Electrostatic Discharge Susceptibility

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

VFG 243.
FCC Code of Federal Regulations, 47 CFR, Part 15, Subpart B,
Class A.

IEC 801-2.

115

Warranted Characteristics

116

Specifications

Typical Characteristics
This subsection contains tables that list the various typical characteristics
that describe the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes.
Typical characteristics are described in terms of typical or average
performance. Typical characteristics are not warranted.
This subsection lists only typical characteristics. A list of warranted charac
teristics starts on page 19.
Table118:Typical Characteristics Vertical Deflection System
Name

Description

UpperFrequency Limit, 20 MHz Band


width Limited

20MHz.

Trace Shift Leakage

The typical amount of trace shift while changing the input coupling
between GND and 1 MW DC is as follows:
Condition

Typical Trace Shift

-10_ C to +35_ C

<0.5 mV.

+35_ C to +55_ C

<2 mV.

Variable Volts/Div Offset

0.5 division trace shift while changing the variable volts/div setting.

Chop Mode Clock Rate

>500 kHz, <1 MHz.


Chop mode is allowed from 0.5 s to 10 ms sec/div settings.

Noise (measured tangentially)

v0.06 div at w10 mV/div (600 mV).

v0.10 div at 5 mV/div (500 mV).

v0.14 div at 2 mV/div (280 mV).

Table119:Typical Characteristics Time Base System


Name

Description

Time Base Linearity

5%.
Sweep linearity applies over the center eight divisions. Excludes
the greater of either the first !@4 division or 25 ns from the sweep
start of the magnified sweep and anything beyond the 100th mag
nified division.

Delay Jitter

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

v1 part in 10,000 (20,000 for 1 ms and slower) + 2 ns, peakto


peak during a twosecond time interval. Exclude the first 0.15 divi
sions of the Main sweep.

117

Typical Characteristics

Table120:Typical Characteristics Triggering System


Name

Description

TAS 465 EdgeType Trigger Sensitivity,


Not DC Coupled

The typical sensitivities are as follows:


Trigger Source

Typical Signal Level for Stable Triggering

Noise Reject

1.2 divisions from DC to 25MHz, in


creasing to 2.2 divisions at 150 MHz.
0.5 division or less will not trigger.

HF REJ

0.30 division from DC to 10 kHz; attenu


ates signals above the upper -3 dB cut
off frequency of 50 kHz.

LF REJ

0.30 division from 100 kHz to 25 MHz,


increasing to 1.0 division at 150 MHz;
attenuates signals below the lower
-3 dB cutoff frequency of 50 kHz.

AC

0.30 division from 350 Hz to 25 MHz,


increasing to 1.0 division at 150 MHz;
attenuates signals below the -3 dB cut
off frequency of 160 Hz.

Typical signal levels for External Triggering are derived by convert


ing divisions to volts, where 1 division equals 100 mV of trigger
signal level.
TAS 455 EdgeType Trigger Sensitivity,
Not DC Coupled

The typical sensitivities are as follows:


Trigger Source

Typical Signal Level for Stable Triggering

Noise Reject

1.2 divisions from DC to 25MHz, in


creasing to 2.2 divisions at 100 MHz.
0.5 division or less will not trigger.

HF REJ

0.30 division from DC to 10 kHz; attenu


ates signals above the upper -3 dB cut
off frequency of 50 kHz.

LF REJ

0.30 division from 100 kHz to 25 MHz,


increasing to 1.0 division at 100 MHz;
attenuates signals below the lower
-3 dB cutoff frequency of 50 kHz.

AC

0.30 division from 350 Hz to 25 MHz,


increasing to 1.0 division at 100 MHz;
attenuates signals below the -3 dB cut
off frequency of 160 Hz.

Typical signal levels for External Triggering are derived by convert


ing divisions to volts, where 1 division equals 100 mV of trigger
signal level.

118

Specifications

Typical Characteristics

Table120:Typical Characteristics Triggering System (Cont.)


Name

Description

Lowest Frequency for Successful Oper


ation of Set Level to 50%" Function

50 Hz with 1 division.

Holdoff Control Range

Increases Main sweep holdoff time by a factor of 10.

Table121:Typical Characteristics Video Triggering System


Name

Description

Field Separation

Stable trigger on odd or even fields in interlaced video systems


with line rates between 12 kHz and 17 kHz.

Table122:Typical Characteristics ZAxis


Name

Description

Sensitivity

The sensitivity is as follows:


Condition

Sensitivity

DC to 2 MHz

Positive voltage decreases intensity;


+2 V blanks a maximum intensity trace.

2 MHz to 20 MHz

+2 V modulates a normal intensity trace.


+2 V (DC to 20 MHz) blanks a 1 mA CRT
beam.

Rise Time

<15 ns.

Input Resistance

10 kW 10%.

Maximum Input Voltage

25 V peak; 25 Vpp AC at 10 kHz or less.

Table123:Typical Characteristics Probe Compensator


Name

Description

Probe Compensator Output Voltage


and F
d Frequency

The limits are as follows:


Limits

Output Voltage

5 V (basetop) 10% into a 1 MW load.

Frequency

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

Characteristic

1 kHz 5%.

119

Typical Characteristics

Table124:Typical Characteristics Setup Memory


Name

Description

Nonvolatile Memory Retention Time

Internal batteries, installed at time of manufacture, have a life of


w10 years when operated and/or stored at an ambient
temperature from 0_ C to +50_ C. Retention time of the
nonvolatile memories is equal to the remaining life of the batteries.
Battery life can be reduced when the instrument is stored for
extended time above +50_ C. Retained data may be lost when
stored for an extended time below 0_ C.

120

Specifications

Installation and Power On


Before you begin using the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes,
perform this procedure to properly install and power them on.
1. Check that you have the proper electrical connections. The TAS 455 and
TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes require 90 to 132 VACRMS or 180 to
250 VACRMS, continuous range from 48 Hz to 440 Hz. A maximum of
85 Watts may be required.
2. Check that the Line Voltage Range switch (Figure 21) is at the proper
setting for your power system.
3. Check the fuse to ensure it is the proper type and rating (the rear panel
provides you with this information). The TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog
Oscilloscopes are shipped with the UL approved fuse installed. Fig
ure 22 illustrates how to open the fuse drawer.
4. Connect the proper power cord from the rearpanel power connector
(Figure 21) to the power system.
Power
Connector

Fuse
Compartment

Line Voltage Range Switch

Figure 21:Rear Panel

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

21

Installation and Power On

Spare Fuse

Grasp the Fuse Drawer


and Pull Straight Out

Pop the Fuse Up from


the Bottom of the Drawer

Figure 22:Fuse Compartment


5. Be sure you have the appropriate operating environment. Specifications
for temperature, relative humidity, altitude, vibrations, and emissions are
in Section 1, Specifications.
6. Leave space for cooling. Do this by verifying that the air intake and
exhaust holes on the sides of the cabinet are free of any airflow obstruc
tions. Leave at least 5.1 cm (2 in.) free on each side.
7. Press the POWER button to power on the oscilloscope. See Figure 23.

POWER
Button

Figure 23:POWER Button

22

Operating Information

Quick Start
This section helps you get acquainted with basic controls and operating
systems of the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes once you have
power applied.

Selecting and
Deselecting Input
Channels

The TAS 455 and TAS 465 Oscilloscopes have two input channels. You can
display the channels separately or simultaneously. The following steps
demonstrate how to select and deselect channels for display.
1. Power on the oscilloscope and wait for the self tests to complete.
2. Press the CH 1 button located on the front panel. The CH 1 indicator
lights, channel 1 is displayed, and vertical controls and menus are
assigned to channel 1.
3. Press the CH 2 button located on the front panel. The CH 2 indicator
lights, channel 2 is displayed, and controls and menus are assigned to
channel 2.
4. Press the CH 1 button, assigning control to channel 1.
5. Press the WAVEFORM OFF button, removing channel 1 from the dis
play and leaving channel 2 displayed.

Using the Menus

The TAS 455 and TAS 465 Oscilloscopes use menus for many instrument
settings. In the following steps, you will set only channel 1 on and turn the
cursors on.
1. Press the WAVEFORM OFF button until only channel 1 is displayed.
2. Press the CURSOR menu button.
3. Set the delta volts (DVOLT) cursors on (using the following guide).

CURSOR MENU

DVOLT
Off

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

ABS V
Off

Off
DTIME
On

1/DT
Off

On

23

Quick Start

4. Now two horizontal bar cursors are displayed. The active (movable) one
is a solid line and the inactive one is a dashed line. Use the General
Purpose Knob to move the active cursor and use the TOGGLE button to
select which cursor is active.

Position Active
Cursor

Active Cursor

Set
Active Cursor

Connecting a Signal

The TAS 455 and TAS 465 Oscilloscopes accept signals through the front
panel input connectors labeled CH 1 and CH 2. The probes you use for
taking measurements should only be those supplied with the TAS 455 and
TAS 465 Oscilloscopes. Connecting signals to the TAS 455 and TAS 465
Oscilloscopes is also possible with the use of 50 W coaxial cables.
Before using any probe to take measurements, compensate the probe to
match the input channel. See Compensating the Probe on page 25.

Using AUTOSET

The AUTOSET feature of the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Oscilloscopes automati
cally sets most of the front panel controls.
1. Connect the probe compensation signal (from the PROBE COMP
connector on the front panel) to either channel of the oscilloscope and
display that channel (see Figure 25). Turn all other channels off.
2. Press the AUTOSET button on the front panel. Wait one to three sec
onds to allow the instrument to adjust all the control settings.
The instrument will trigger on the waveform, display at least one complete
cycle, and center it horizontally on the CRT. The baseline of the waveform
will be at the center horizontal graticule line (see Figure 24). The intensity
level is increased if set too low for a viewable display.

24

Operating Information

Quick Start

Figure 24:Probe Compensation Signal Displayed after AUTOSET

Compensating the
Probe

Passive probes require compensation to ensure maximum distortionfree


input to the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Oscilloscopes. Before taking any mea
surements using a probe, first check the compensation of the probe and
adjust it to match the channel inputs. The signal source for this check is the
frontpanel PROBE COMP signal (Figure 25).
1. Attach the probe to either the CH 1 or CH 2 input connectors along the
lower right of the front panel.
2. Attach the probe tip to the PROBE COMP connector.

Figure 25:Connections for Compensating a Probe

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

25

Quick Start

3. Select the appropriate input channel, channel 1 or channel 2, by press


ing the CH 1 or CH 2 frontpanel button.
4. With the probe attached between an input channel and the probe com
pensation output of the oscilloscope, press the AUTOSET button on the
front panel.
5. Set the vertical scale to 1 V using the VOLTS/DIV control.
6. Center the waveform vertically using the vertical POSITION control.
7. Set the horizontal scale to 200 ms using the SEC/DIV control.
8. Set the trigger coupling to Noise Reject (use the following guide).

MAIN TRIGGER MENU

MODE
Auto

SRC
Ch1

CPLG
Noise

DC
SLOPE
Rise

HOLDOFF
Off

Noise Reject
HF Reject
MORE
1 of 2

9. Set the vertical bandwidth to Full (use the following guide).

CHANNEL 1 MENU
CPLG
AC

VAR
Off

INV
Off

20 MHz
BW
Full

Full

10. Check that the displayed waveform is a square wave with flat tops and
bottoms. See Figure 26 for illustrations indicating proper and improper
probe compensation.

26

Operating Information

Quick Start

Probe Compensated Correctly

Probe Over Compensated

Probe Under Compensated

Figure 26:How Probe Compensation Affects Signals


11. Adjust the low frequency compensation adjustment, located in the
probe body, for the best possible square wave. See Figure 27 for the
location of the low frequency adjustment.

Lowfrequency
Adjustment

Figure 27:Location of Probe Head Adjustment

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

27

Quick Start

Menu Map

Figure 28 is a map of the menus to help you locate menudriven functions


and their available settings. Refer to the Instruction manual for operating
information about each menu.

DC
AC
GND

VERTICAL
MENU
Button

CPLG
VAR
INV
BW

Main Mode

Select LED on

Off
On

odd even both

Off
On
20 MHz
Full

TRIGGER
MENU
Button

MODE
SRC
CPLG

ALT/CHOP
,
ADD
Menu Button

ADD
DISP

HORIZONTAL
MENU
Button

MAIN
DELAY
XY

SLOPE

Off
On
Alt
Chop

Auto
Auto Level
Normal
Single Sequence
Video Line
Video Field

HOLDOFF

SELECT toggles
between Main and
Delay modes

Off
On

Priority Vert
Ch1
Ch2
Add
Line
EXT
1 10

DC
Noise Reject
HF Reject
AC
LF Reject
Rising
Falling

VAR
Off (min)
On

TRCSEP
SAVE/RECALL
SETUP
Menu Button

RECALL
SAVE
ERASE

CURSOR
Menu Button

1
2
3
4

Select LED off

DVOLT
ABS V
DTIME

Off
On

1/DT

UTILITY
Menu Button

Delay Mode

CONFIG
CAL
ID

Refer to the Instruction


manual for actual Utility
menus

Delay Intensity
Video Sync
Dual Delay
Single Sequence
Readout
Calibration Routines

TRIGGER
MENU
Button

MODE
SRC
CPLG
SLOPE

SELECT toggles
between Main and
Delay modes

Software Version

Runs After
Trig After
Video Line
Ch1
Ch2
Add
Line
DC
Noise Reject
HF Reject
AC
LF Reject
Rising
Falling

Figure 28:Menu Map

28

Operating Information

Circuit Description
This section describes the electrical operation of the Tektronix TAS 455 and
TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes. Refer to the schematics in the Diagrams
section as necessary.

Logic Conventions

This manual refers to digital logic circuits with standard logic symbols and
terms. Unless otherwise stated, all logic functions are described using the
positive logic convention: the more positive of the two logic levels is the high
(1) state and the more negative level is the low (0) state. Signal states may
also be described as true" meaning their active state or false" meaning
their nonactive state. The specific voltages that constitute a high or low
state vary among the electronic devices.
Activelow signals are indicated by a tilde (~) prefixed to the signal name
(~RESET). Signal names are considered to be either activehigh, activelow,
or to have both activehigh and activelow states.

Module
Interconnection

Figure 31 shows the interconnection paths between the modules of the


TAS 455 and TAS 465 Oscilloscopes.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

31

Circuit Description

DISPLAY CONTROL BOARD


A02
J82
2 PINS
J80
2 PINS

P82

P80

5 PINS
J84
P84
5
P84
J84
PROCESSOR BOARD
A05

5 PINS
P30 P30
16

J30
16 PINS

J30
16 PINS

J50
40 PINS

P50

J55
5 PINS

P55

40

FRONTPANEL
BOARD
A04

PROBE COMP

J35
J40
10 PINS

GND

BEZEL
BUTTON
BOARD
A09
10 PINS
P40

SW
115/230V

5 TERMINATIONS
LV & HV POWER SUPPLY BOARD
A63
12 TERMINATIONS
FAN

2 PINS

2 TERMINATIONS

12
2

1 TERMINATION

Figure 31:Block Diagram

32

Theory of Operation

Circuit Description

ANALOG BOARD
A01
J10

CH 1

ATTENUATOR
J401

J11

CH 2

ATTENUATOR
J402

DISPLAY DRIVER BOARD


A03

J20

EXT TRIG

P80
J403
J68
2 PINS

P50

J50
40 PINS

P68

J67
23 PINS

P67
23

J75

VERTICAL
J69 DEFLECTION
2 PINS

P75

NC

J73
5 PINS
W66
23 TERMINATIONS

A64
P73 P76
5
9

J21
J66
P71

J70
13 PINS

J72
4 PINS

P72
4

J74

P70

P66
EXT ZAXIS

P69
DL68

J80
2 PINS

P74

HORIZONTAL
J71 DEFLECTION
2 PINS

NC

12
2
HIGH VOLTAGE

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

33

Circuit Description

Analog Board

A signal enters the oscilloscope through a probe connected to a BNC on the


A1 Analog board.

Attenuators A1

The attenuator hybrids, AT401 and AT402, and the vertical preamplifier IC
select the input coupling, attenuation factor, variable gain, and the invert
function. The processor system controls and calibrates the attenuators.

Probe Coding Interface A1

Probe coding interface signals pass through the A1 Analog board to the A5
CPU board and then to the A4 Front Panel board. The probe interface
signals are digitized on the Front Panel board and communicated to the
processor system to control the instrument.

Analog Acquisition Hybrid A1

The input signals are routed to the highly integrated analog acquisition
hybrid, U405, which does the analog processing required to provide vertical,
horizontal, and Zaxis signals to the A3 Display Driver board. Under control
of the processor, the hybrid provides vertical signal processing, triggers,
sweeps, sequencing logic, and intensity control.

External Trigger A1

A high impedance buffer is used to interface the external trigger signal to the
analog acquisition hybrid.

Processor System

The processor board is a microcontroller design. Microcontroller U201 is the


core of the circuit, operating at 16 MHz. The primary function of the proces
sor is to receive input from the front panel, display the readout, and control
the A1 Analog board.
The processor board can be divided into five subsystems: the processor, the
ROM/RAM, the readout, the frontpanel interface, and the analog board
interface. A description of each subsystem follows.

Processor Subsystem A5

The processor subsystem consists of a 32bit integrated microcontroller and


its supporting circuits. It contains four peripheral modules; the CPU, a gener
alpurpose timer (GPT), a queued serial module (QSM), and a system in
tegration module (SIM).

34

Theory of Operation

Circuit Description

The GPT inputs are used for measuring the main and delay sweep gates, as
well as the measurement latches. The outputs of the GPT are used for
loading or resetting various sections of the analog board.
The QSM is primarily used as a synchronous bus for setting up the internal
register bits of the GCS, HS, preamp and DACs on the analog board.
The SIM module does all of the chip selecting for all of the addressable ICs
on the processor board. U201 has three types of support circuitry. The first
type is pullup resistors for IRQ lines and for configuring the processor boot
up. The second type is a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillates at 32 kHz.
The processor uses a phase lock loop to create a 16 MHz system clock from
this crystal. The third type is a poweron reset circuit. The reset circuit,
consisting mainly of U207, is a passive circuit that monitors VCC. When the
power supply exceeds 4.5V, U207 releases the reset line allowing the pro
cessor to run. If VCC drops below 4.5V a reset occurs.

ROM/RAM Subsystem A5

The ROM/RAM subsystem consists of 256 kb of Flash ROM, 256 kb of static


RAM, and 64 kb of nonvolatile static RAM. The Flash ROM has a require
ment which states that it must not have an OE during a write cycle. Conse
quently, the gates of U221 in this subsystem prevent this from happening.

Readout Subsystem A5

The readout subsystem consists of a custom readout IC, two DACs, a 2.5 V
reference voltage, and some support resistors and capacitors for compensa
tion and filtering. The readout IC has an internal RAM into which the proces
sor puts ascii characters. The processor also controls the state of the read
out IC for calibration, cursor positioning, and update rate. The readout IC
itself then drives the vertical and horizontal DACs as well as the blanking.

FrontPanel Interface Subsystem A5

The frontpanel interface subsystem consists of U215 (DUART) and its


3.686 MHz crystal. The processor communicates to the frontpanel proces
sor through an RS232 like interface. This interface is maintained by the
DUART, running at 9600 baud. The DUART is connected to IRQ5 on the
processor. U201 talks to U215 using data lines D8 through D15.

Analog Board Interface Subsystem A5

The analog board interface subsystem consists of an ECL to CMOS convert


er and a CMOS to ECL converter. The SGMAIN lines coming from the ana
log board are ECL. These lines are converted to CMOS by using two transis
tors and a couple of resistors.
The EXTTRIG lines going to the analog board need to be ECL. These lines
are converted using three resistors each.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

35

Circuit Description

Display Assembly

All information (waveforms, text, and cursors) is displayed by the A3 Display


Driver board. It generates the high voltages necessary to drive the CRT. It
also contains the vertical and horizontal amplifier circuitry.

Vertical Output A3

The vertical output amplifier provides the final stage of amplification of the
vertical signal. The output of the vertical amplifier is connected to the CRT
vertical plates. Vertical time and frequency compensation networks, some
which are adjustable are also contained in this circuit block. The compensa
tion networks corrects for errors in the time response of the vertical delay
line and variations in time and frequency response of the total vertical sys
tem. The vertical signal at the input of the vertical output stage is sampled
and sent back to the trigger circuitry on the analog board. This feedback
vertical signal is used for calibration.

Horizontal Output A3

The horizontal output amplifier provides the final stage of amplification of the
horizontal signal and drives the CRT horizontal plates directly. The input
signal from the analog board is current, and the output signal to the CRT is
a voltage.

High Voltage A3

This circuitry provides the necessary static and dynamic levels to support
the CRT biasing and Zaxis drive. The Zaxis amplifier provides amplification
of the Zaxis signal from the analog board which is a current. The output of
the Zaxis amplifier is then applied to the DC restorer circuitry which level
shifts this signal to the cathode level. A focus amplifier receives its input
signal from a user control on the front panel. This enables the user to opti
mize the CRT focus. Additional circuitry is provided to support the necessary
bias and operation levels for the CRT.
The External ZAxis connector provides the ability to modulate the Zaxis
amplifier circuit on the A3 Display Driver board, thus modulating or blanking
the intensity of the CRT display.

Vertical Termination (TAS 485 only)

Front Panel

36

The processor system sends and receives information to and from the A4
Front Panel board. The Front Panel board reads the frontpanel controls and
changes in their settings are reported to the processor system. The front
panel processor turns the LEDs on and off, generates the probe compensa
tion signal, and processes the probe coding interface signals.

Theory of Operation

Circuit Description

Menu Switches A4

Frontpanel menu switches are read by the Front Panel board and changes
in menu selections are sent to the processor system.

CPU A4

U101 is the frontpanel processor (FPP) and monitors the frontpanel con
trols. It is a single chip microprocessor with builtin RAM, ROM, AtoD
converter, programmable timer, and serial communications interface.
The frontpanel processor reports any changes in state of the frontpanel
controls to the U201 on the A5 CPU board via the serial communication
interface.
The programmable timer TCMP1 (U101 pin 2) produces a 0 to 5V, 1kHz
square wave signal (CALSIG) that is used for probe compensation. TCMP2
(U101 pin 1) produces a 0 to 5V, 1 kHz signal that is converted to ECL level
(DITHER) by the resistive divider R503-R505. DITHER is used by the Ana
log Signal Processor on the analog board.

FPP Pots and Probes A4

The pot/probe scanner working with the AtoD converter internal to the
frontpanel processor digitizes the inputs and reports the amount a pot has
turned and the type of probe used.
Control lines to analog multiplexers U420 and U421 determine whether to
scan for pots or probes. If pots are to be scanned, one of 10 possible pot
inputs is read from either multiplexer U420 or U421. The voltage at the wiper
of the pot selected is applied to the frontpanel processor and digitized. The
amount and direction of change from the previous stored value is calculated
and sent to the host processor 68331 on the processor board.
The intensity and readout intensity pots on the front bezel are stopped pots
and represent one input each on the analog multiplexer U420. The other 8
pot inputs on U420 and U421 represent the 4 continuous rotation pots on
the front panel which are made of two wipers separated by 180 degrees and
contact a single resistive arc. Each continuous rotation pot represents two
inputs to the multiplexers.
Analog multiplexer U420 also selects one of the 4 possible probe inputs.
The probe code resistance from the P6139 probe is converted to a voltage
by pullup resistors R411-R414. This voltage is read by the pot/probe
scanner and the probe type is determined and sent to the host processor.

LEDs and Driver A4

There are 5 LEDs (light emitting diodes) on the front panel which are con
nected between the outputs of an 8 bit LED latch, U202, and a pullup
resistor to +5 V. When a particular LED needs to be turned on or off, the

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

37

Circuit Description

frontpanel processor converts the LED identification received from the host
processor to the correct LED address on the latch (U202) and changes the
state of the LED.

Switches A4

The frontpanel switches and menu switches are arranged in an array of 9


rows and 8 columns. The switch scanner sets the nine row lines low in
sequence and performs an eight column scan to check for any changes in
state and reports these changes to the host processor. When a switch is
closed, one row is connected to one column line through an isolation diode
and the column line is pulled low indicating a switch closure.

Power Supply

The power supply is a switching power converter. It supplies power to all


oscilloscope circuitry.
Two generations of power supplies were produced. The early version re
quires the operator to configure it to the incoming line voltage; the later
version automatically adjusts to the incoming line voltage and has no exter
nal adjustments. The new power supply was introduced at serial number
B020100 and is not documented in this manual.
If an early model power supply is replaced with the later version, check with
your local Tektronix representative about obtaining the necessary firmware
upgrade.
The POWER switch, located on the front panel, controls all power to the
oscilloscope including the power supply.

Fan

38

The fan provides forced air cooling for the oscilloscope. It connects to +12V
on the A63 Power Supply board.

Theory of Operation

General Instructions
This Performance Verification section is divided into two subsections, Brief
Performance Checks and Performance Tests.
The Brief Performance Checks section contains procedures to verify the
operation of the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes.
The Performance Tests section contains procedures to confirm the
performance of the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Oscilloscopes to its warranted
specifications.

Using the Brief


Performance Checks
Procedures

The Brief Performance Checks contain three procedures: PowerOn Self


Tests, Functional Tests, and Temperature Compensation Calibrations. Com
pleting these checks takes approximately one hour.
The Self Tests are performed each time the oscilloscope in powered on.
The Functional Tests use the probe compensation output on the front panel
as a testsignal source for further verifying that the oscilloscope functions
properly. A standardaccessory probe, included with this oscilloscope, is the
only equipment required.
To rapidly confirm that this oscilloscope functions and was adjusted proper
ly, perform the procedures in the Functional Tests section; which begin on
page 43.
Advantages: These procedures are quick to do, require no external equip
ment or signal sources, and provide high confidence that the oscilloscope
will perform properly. These also provide handson experience to become
familiar with the controls and menus.
The Temperature Compensation Calibrations allow you to adjust the display
accuracy of the oscilloscope.

Using the
Performance Tests
Procedures

The Performance Tests confirm that the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Oscilloscopes
perform as specified. The Performance Tests begin on page 413. Complet
ing these tests takes approximately two hours and requires suitable test
equipment. (See Equipment Required on page 413.)
Advantages: These procedures add direct checking of warranted specifica
tions.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

41

General Instructions

Conventions

The procedures in this section provide the following information:


H

Title of test

Equipment required (if applicable)

Procedure

Where instructed to use a frontpanel control or select from a menu, the


name appears in boldface type. For example, press VERTICAL MENU;
then set CPLG to DC."
The symbol at the left is accompanied by information you must read
to do the procedure properly.
These procedures make references to the graticule lines. For example,
position the cursor to the second vertical graticule line." Figure 41 shows
how to interpret the references.
Top Horizontal
Graticule Line

Center Horizontal
Graticule Line

First Vertical
Graticule Line

Center Vertical
Graticule Line

Tenth Vertical
Graticule Line

Figure 41:Graticule References


These procedures may ask you to check for a stable display. A stable dis
play is consistent. The display should not have its trigger point switching
slopes (double trigger) nor should it freerun." The MAIN SWP TRIG'D LED
should remain lit.

42

Performance Verification

Brief Performance Checks


This section contains three brief procedures: two that verify the operation of
the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes and one to perform a brief
calibration to compensate for temperature variances.
The PowerOn Self Tests use internal routines (performed at each power on)
to confirm basic functionality and proper adjustment.
The Functional Tests further verify that the oscilloscope functions properly.
These tests utilize the front panel PROBE COMP signal and a standard
accessory probe.
The Temperature Compensation Calibrations use internal routines and
actions from you to adjust the display accuracy of the oscilloscope. These
adjustments are typically necessary only when the operating temperature
and the last calibration temperature varies more than 5_ C. However,
performing these compensations before making a critical measurement
ensures optimum accuracy.
If any of these tests return a failed message or do not perform as stated,
contact your local Tektronix service center or sales engineer for more
information.

PowerOn Self Tests

These tests verify that the internal poweron diagnostics passed by confirm
ing no error messages are reported on screen.

Functional Tests

The purpose of these procedures is to confirm that this oscilloscope func


tions properly. The only equipment required is a standardaccessory probe.
These procedures verify function; that is, they verify that the oscillo
scope operates. They do not verify that it operates within limits.
Therefore, when the functional tests that follow instruct you to verify
that a signal appears on screen that is about five divisions in ampli
tude" or has a period of about six horizontal divisions," do not
interpret the quantities given as limits. Operation within limits is
checked in Performance Tests, which begin on page 413.
DO NOT make changes to the frontpanel settings that are not
called out in the procedures. Each verification procedure requires
you to set the oscilloscope to certain default settings before verifying
functions. If you make changes to these default settings, other than
those called out in the procedure, you may obtain invalid results. In
this case, begin the procedure again from step 1.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

43

Brief Performance Checks

Functional Tests Prerequisites


1. Power on the oscilloscope and allow a 20 minute warmup before per
forming this procedure; adjust the READOUT control to display the
readout and the INTENSITY control to display waveforms.
2. Disable the dual delay with the following menu selections.
a. Press the UTILITY button and select CONFIG from the main menu.
b. Select MORE until you can select Dual Delay Disabled.
3. Press the ALT/CHOP ADD button and set ADD to Off.
,
4. Install the probe on CH 1. Connect the probe tip to PROBE COMP on
the frontpanel; connect the probe ground to the ground barrel of an
unused input BNC (see Figure 42).
Some functional checks require that you install the probe on connectors
other than CH 1. All functional checks use the PROBE COMP on the
frontpanel as the signal source.

Figure 42:Test Hookup for Functional Tests

Verify the Probe Compensator Output


1. Press the WAVEFORM OFF button until the readout indicates that only
channel 1 is selected.
2. Press the AUTOSET button.
3. Press the VERTICAL MENU button and set CPLG to DC.
4. Set the volts/div scale to 1 V and vertically center the display.
5. Set the sec/div scale to 500 ms.
6. Press the CURSOR button and set DVOLT to On.
7. Align the active cursor to the top of the signal using the General Purpose
Knob.

44

Performance Verification

Brief Performance Checks

8. Press the TOGGLE button and align the active cursor to the bottom of
the signal using the General Purpose Knob.
9. Verify that the DVolts readout is about 5.2 V.
10. Set 1/DT to On.
11. Align the active cursor to a rising edge of the signal using the General
Purpose Knob.
12. Press the TOGGLE button and align the active cursor to the next rising
edge of the signal using the General Purpose Knob.
13. Verify that the 1/DT readout is about 1 kHz.
14. Set DTIME to On.
15. Verify that the DTime readout is about 1 ms.

Verify the Input Channels


1. Display the channel to be verified and turn all others off.
2. Install the probe on the channel to be verified.
3. Press the AUTOSET button.
4. Press the VERTICAL MENU button and set CPLG to DC.
5. Verify that the channel is operational, confirming the following state
ments are true.
H

The vertical scale readout is set to 2 V for the channel under test
and a square wave signal about 2.6 divisions in amplitude is on
screen.

Pressing the SET LEVEL TO 50% button sets the trigger level
readout to approximately 2.7 V.

The vertical POSITION control moves the signal up and down the
screen when rotated. Return the bottom portion of the displayed
waveform to the center horizontal graticule line.

Turning the VOLTS/DIV control counterclockwise and clockwise


decreases and increases the amplitude of the waveform. Return the
volts/div scale to 2 V.

6. Press the VERTICAL MENU button and select CPLG. Select the follow
ing coupling types and verify the display.
H
H

Select AC coupling, press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button, and


verify that the waveform is centered at about the center horizontal
graticule line.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

Select DC coupling and verify that the waveform amplitude is posi


tivegoing from the center horizontal graticule line.

Select GND coupling and verify that a straight line is displayed (no
waveform).

45

Brief Performance Checks

7. Return the coupling to DC and press the CLEAR MENU button.


8. Repeat this procedure until all input channels are verified.

Verify the Alt/Chop and Add Functions


1. Install the probe on CH 1.
2. Press the WAVEFORM OFF button until the readout indicates channel 1
is the only selected channel.
3. Press the AUTOSET button.
4. Press the CH 2 button, then position the channel 2 trace to the bottom
horizontal graticule line.
5. Press the WAVEFORM OFF button, removing the channel 2 display.
6. Press the ALT/CHOP ADD button and set ADD to On.
,
7. Verify that a second waveform of approximately 2.6 divisions amplitude
has been added to the display.
8. Set DISP to Chop.
9. Set the sec/div scale to 100 ms.
10. Verify that the two waveforms are displayed simultaneously.
11. Set DISP to Alt.
12. Verify that the two waveforms are displayed alternately.
13. Set ADD to Off.
14. Press the CLEAR MENU button.

Verify the Time Base


1. Press the WAVEFORM OFF button until the readout indicates channel 1
is the only selected channel.
2. Install the probe on CH 1.
3. Press the AUTOSET button.

46

Performance Verification

Brief Performance Checks

4. Verify that the main time base is operational, confirming the following
statements are true.
H

One period of the square wave is about five horizontal divisions.

Rotate the SEC/DIV control clockwise and verify that the waveform
expands (more horizontal divisions per period of waveform) and that
counterclockwise rotation contracts it.

Set the sec/div scale to 1 ms and verify that approximately one


period of waveform per horizontal division is displayed.

Rotate the horizontal POSITION control and verify that the waveform
moves left and right onscreen.

Pressing the MAG button changes the sec/div scale from 1 ms to


100 ms and one period of the square wave is about ten horizontal
divisions. Return to a nonmagnified display by pressing the MAG
button again.

5. Press the HORIZONTAL MENU button and set DELAY to On.


6. Set the delayed sec/div scale to 500 ms.
7. Press the TRIGGER MENU button and set MODE to Runs After.
8. Press the HORIZONTAL MENU button.
9. Select TRCSEP from the main menu and vertically position the delayed
time base below the main time base using the General Purpose Knob.
10. Select DELAY from the main menu.
11. Verify that the delayed time base is operational, confirming the following
statements are true:
H

The main sweep has an intensified zone of approximately 5.5 hori


zontal divisions. Adjust the INTENSITY level if necessary to view the
entire intensified zone.

Rotating the General Purpose Knob clockwise moves the intensified


zone to the right onscreen. Position the intensified portion to the
center of the screen.

12. Adjust the delayed sec/div scale to 200 ms.


13. Set MAIN to Off and confirm that only the delayed sec/div scale is
displayed and the period of the squarewave signal is about five horizon
tal divisions.
14. Set MAIN to On and DELAY to Off.

Verify the Trigger System


1. Press the WAVEFORM OFF button until the readout indicates channel 1
is the only selected channel.
2. Press the AUTOSET button.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

47

Brief Performance Checks

3. Set the sec/div scale to 1 ms.


4. Press the TRIGGER MENU button and set MODE to Auto.
5. Verify that the main trigger is operational, confirming that the following
statements are true:
H

Rotating the trigger LEVEL control changes the main trigger level
readout.

Rotating the trigger LEVEL control through its range triggers and
untriggers the display. Leave the signal untriggered.

Pressing the SET LEVEL TO 50% button triggers the signal and the
trigger level readout indicates approximately 2.7 V.

6. Press the HORIZONTAL MENU button and set DELAY to On.


7. Set the delayed sec/div scale to 500 ms.
8. Verify that the delayed sweep is operational, confirming that an intensi
fied zone appears on the main sweep.
9. Press the TRIGGER MENU button and set MODE to Trig After and
SRC to Ch1.
10. Verify that the delayed trigger is operational, confirming that the follow
ing statements are true:
H

Rotating the trigger LEVEL control changes the delayed trigger level
readout.

Rotating the trigger LEVEL control through its range triggers and
untriggers (intensified zone displayed and not displayed) the
delayed sweep. Leave the signal untriggered.

Pressing the SET LEVEL TO 50% button triggers the signal, the
trigger level readout indicates approximately 2.7 V, and the intensi
fied zone is displayed.

11. Press the HORIZONTAL MENU button and set DELAY to Off.
12. Set the sec/div scale to 50 ms.
13. Press the TRIGGER MENU button and set MODE to Single Sequence
and confirm the following statements are true:
H

There is no waveform displayed.

Pressing the RESET S SEQ button causes one sweep of the


waveform display to occur.

14. Set the sec/div scale to 1 ms.


15. Set MODE to Auto Level.
16. Disconnect the probe from the oscilloscope.

48

Performance Verification

Brief Performance Checks

Verify the External Trigger


1. Press the TRIGGER MENU button; set MODE to Normal and SRC to
EXT <1>. Confirm that no sweep is displayed.
2. Install the probe on the EXT TRIG connector. Connect the probe tip to
PROBE COMP on the frontpanel; connect the probe ground to the
ground barrel of an unused input BNC.
3. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button.
4. Verify that the main sweep is triggered and a single trace is displayed.
5. Press the AUTOSET button.
6. Disconnect the probe from the oscilloscope.

Temperature
Compensation
Calibrations

The procedures that follow allow you to quickly compensate the calibration
of the oscilloscope for any external temperature variations. This ensures the
most accurate measurements. No test equipment is required to perform
these procedures.
Optimum instrument performance depends on the recommended
20 minute minimum warmup time prior to performing the following
calibration routines. All calibration routines require a successful
completion (no failed" message).
The Temperature Compensation Calibrations affect the accuracy of
the display system; therefore, they should only be performed by a
qualified technician.

Horizontal Sweep Path


1. Press the AUTOSET button.
2. Press the UTILITY button and select CAL from the main menu.
3. Select Horizontal Sweep Path from the sub menu, initiating the routine.
The Horizontal Sweep Path routine takes about 20 seconds to com
plete its initial calibrations. Once complete, two dots are displayed. The
displayed dots are used for the next horizontal calibration steps.

NOTE
The following steps use both the General Purpose Knob and the
TOGGLE button to make adjustments. The General Purpose Knob
performs two functions: to adjust gain and centering. Pressing the
TOGGLE button selects the function of the General Purpose Knob.
4. Use a combination of the TOGGLE button and the General Purpose
Knob to position the two dots eight divisions apart, centered horizontally
(see Figure 43).

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

49

Brief Performance Checks

Gain and Position


Adjustment

Dots Eight Divisions


Apart, Centered
Horizontally

Toggle Between
Gain and Position
Adjustment

Figure 43:Horizontal Adjustments (One)


5. Select Done when you have the appropriate display.
6. Again, use a combination of the TOGGLE button and the General Pur
pose Knob to position the two dots eight divisions apart, centered
horizontally (see Figure 43).
7. Select Done when you have the appropriate display.
8. One dot is now displayed.
9. Use a combination of the TOGGLE button and the General Purpose
Knob to horizontally center the single dot at the center of the screen
(see Figure 44).
Continue to press the TOGGLE button and adjusting the dot to center
screen with the General Purpose Knob until the dot stays horizontally
centered while pressing the TOGGLE button.

Position
Adjustment
Center Dot
Horizontally

Toggle Dot Position

Figure 44:Horizontal Adjustments (Two)

410

Performance Verification

Brief Performance Checks

10. Select Done when you have the appropriate display.


11. Two vertical lines are now displayed.

Gain and Position


Adjustment
Lines Eight Divisions
Apart, Centered
Horizontally
Toggle Between
Gain and Position
Adjustment

Figure 45:Horizontal Adjustments (Three)


12. Use a combination of the TOGGLE button and the General Purpose
Knob to position the two lines eight divisions apart, centered horizontally
(see Figure 45).
13. Select Done when you have the appropriate display.
14. A pass or failed status appears on the screen.
15. Select Done to exit the routine, displaying a Calibration Finished
message.

Vertical Signal Path


1. Press the AUTOSET button.
2. Press the UTILITY button and select CAL from the main menu.
3. Select Vertical Signal Path from the sub menu, initiating the routine.
4. Remove any input signals from the oscilloscope.
5. Select Done.
The Vertical Signal Path routine takes about one minute to complete.
When finished, a pass or failed status will appear on the screen.
6. Press Done to exit the routine, displaying a Calibration Finished mes
sage.
7. Press the CLEAR MENU button.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

411

Brief Performance Checks

412

Performance Verification

Performance Tests
This subsection contains procedures to verify that the TAS 455 and TAS 465
Analog Oscilloscopes perform as warranted.
The procedures are arranged in three logical groupings: Vertical Checks,
Horizontal Checks, and Trigger Checks. They check all the characteristics
that are designated as checked in Section 1, Specifications. (The checked
characteristics appear in boldface type under Warranted Characteristics in
Section 1.)
These procedures extend the confidence level provided by the Brief Perfor
mance Checks in this section.

Performance Tests
Prerequisites

The tests in this subsection comprise an extensive, valid confirma


tion of performance and functionality when the following require
ments are met:
H

The cabinet must be installed on the oscilloscope.

The PowerOn Self Tests show no failures.

You must have completed the Temperature Compensation Calibrations,


beginning on page 49.

The oscilloscope must have an operating warmup period of at least


20 minutes at an ambient temperature between -10_ C and +55_ C.

Set the INTENSITY and READOUT controls for nominal viewing levels.

Set the delayed sweep intensity to Intensity Delay > Main in the Utility
Configure menu.

Related Information Read General Instructions that start on page 41.

If you are not familiar with operating this oscilloscope, read Quick Start in
Section 2 before performing these procedures.

Equipment Required

These procedures use external, traceable signal sources to directly check


warranted characteristics. Table 41 lists the required test equipment.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

413

Performance Tests

Table41:Required Test Equipment


Item Number and
Description

Minimum Requirements

Example

Purpose

Attenuator, 5X1

Ratio: 5X; Impedance 50 W;


Connectors: female BNC input,
male BNC output

Tektronix part number


011-0060-02

Signal attenuation

Attenuator, 10X

Ratio: 10X; Impedance 50 W;


Connectors: female BNC input,
male BNC output

Tektronix part number


011-0059-02

Signal attenuation

Termination,
50 W (two re
quired)

Impedance 50 W; Connectors:
female BNC input, male BNC
output

Tektronix part number


011-0049-01

Signal
interconnection

Termination,
75 W

Impedance 75 W; Connectors:
female BNC input, male BNC
output

Tektronix part number


011-0102-01

Signal
interconnection,
video

Cable, Precision
Coaxial

50 W, 36 in, maletomale BNC


connectors

Tektronix part number


012-0482-00

Signal
interconnection

Cable, Coaxial

75 W, 36 in, maletomale BNC


connectors

Tektronix part number


012-1338-00

Signal
interconnection,
video

Coupler, Dual
Input

FemaleBNCtodualmaleBNC

Tektronix part number


067052502

Signal
interconnection

Generator, Lev
eled Sine Wave

200 kHz to 250 MHz; Variable


amplitude from 5mV to 4 Vpp
into 50 W

Trigger and
bandwidth checks

Generator, Time
Mark

Variable marker frequency from


10 ms to 10 ns; accuracy within
25 ppm

Wavetek 9100 Universal


Calibration System with
Oscilloscope Calibration
Module (Option 250)

Timing accuracy
checks

10 Generator, Pulse

High Amplitude pulse with variable


amplitude of 60 V to 100 V

Gain accuracy
checks

11 Generator, DC
Calibration

DC voltage levels from 100 mV to


10 V

Gain accuracy
checks

12 Probe, 10X, in
cluded with this
instrument

Standard accessory probe

TEKTRONIX P6109B

Signal
interconnection

13 Digital
Multimeter

DC voltage to 10V

TEKTRONIX DM2510

Power Supply
Adjustment

14 Generator, Video
Signal

Provides NTSC compatible


outputs

TEKTRONIX TSG 100

Video trigger check

15 Adjustment Tool1

0.1 inch hex on both ends

GC Electronics #8606

Internal adjustments

1 This

414

item is used only when performing the Adjustment Procedures.

Performance Verification

Performance Tests

Vertical System
Checks

These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the vertical


system and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in
Section 1, Specifications.

Check DC Gain and Voltage Measurement Accuracy


Equipment Required: One pulse generator (item 10) and one precision
coaxial cable (item 5).
1. Display the channel to be verified, turning all others off.
2. Press the AUTOSET button.
3. Set the sec/div scale to 500 ms.
4. Press the TRIGGER MENU button and set CPLG to Noise Reject.
5. Press the CURSOR button and set DVolt to On.
6. Press the VERTICAL MENU button and make the following selections:
H

Set CPLG to DC

Set BW to 20 MHz

7. Set the volts/div scale to 2 mV.


8. Position the trace three divisions below the center horizontal graticule
line.
9. Connect the standard amplitude output of the pulse generator to the
input of the channel to be verified as shown in Figure 46.
Pulse Generator

Precision Cable

Figure 46:Gain and Voltage Test Setup


10. Set the pulse generator for 10 mV amplitude output.
11. Use the General Purpose Knob and TOGGLE button to precisely align
the cursors to the signal peaks.
12. Check the Displayed Signal Accuracy and Volts Readout Accuracy while
setting the Volts/Div Scale and the Input Amplitude given in Table 42.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

415

Performance Tests

Table42:DC Gain and Delta Volts Accuracy


Volts/Div
Scale

Input
Amplitude

Displayed
Signal Accuracy

Delta Volts
Readout Accuracy

2 mV

10 mV

4.87 to 5.13 div

9.80 mV to 10.2 mV

5 mV

20 mV

3.9 to 4.1 div

19.6 mV to 20.4 mV

10 mV

50 mV

4.87 to 5.13 div

49.0 mV to 51.0 mV

20 mV

0.1 V

4.87 to 5.13 div

98.0 mV to 102 mV

50 mV

0.2 V

3.9 to 4.1 div

196 mV to 204 mV

100 mV

0.5 V

4.87 to 5.13 div

490 mV to 510 mV

1V

5V

4.87 to 5.13 div

4.90 V to 5.10 V

13. Return the volts/div scale to 2 mV and set the pulse generator for 10 mV
amplitude output.
14. Press the VERTICAL MENU button and set VAR to On.
15. Check that rotating the General Purpose Knob counterclockwise re
duces the displayed signal amplitude to two divisions or less. Set VAR
to Off.
16. Disconnect the test setup from the oscilloscope.
17. Repeat this procedure until you have verified all input channels.
18. Press the CURSOR button and set DVolt to Off.

Check Trigger Level Accuracy


Equipment Required: One DC calibration generator (item 11) and one
precision coaxial cable (item 5).
1. Display channel 1, turning all others off.
2. Press the AUTOSET button.
3. Set the sec/div scale to 500 ms.
4. Press the TRIGGER MENU button and make the following selections:
H

Set CPLG to DC

Set SLOPE to Rising

5. Press the VERTICAL MENU button and make the following selections:
H

Set CPLG to DC

Set BW to 20 MHz

6. Set the volts/div scale to 50 mV.


7. Position the trace three divisions below the center horizontal graticule
line.

416

Performance Verification

Performance Tests

8. Connect the DC calibration generator to the CH 1 input as shown in


Figure 47.
DC Calibration Generator

Precision Cable

Figure 47:Trigger Level Test Setup


9. Set the DC calibration generator for a 200 mV output.
10. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button.
11. Check that the Trigger Level Accuracy readout is in the range of 169 mV
to 231 mV.
12. Press the TRIGGER MENU button and set SLOPE to Falling.
13. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button.
14. Check that the Trigger Level Accuracy readout is in the range of 169 mV
to 231 mV.
15. Press the MAIN/DELAY SELECT button, displaying the delay trigger
menu.
16. Set MODE to Runs After and SRC to Ch1.
17. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button.
18. Check that the Trigger Level Accuracy readout is in the range of 169 mV
to 231 mV.
19. Disconnect the test setup from the oscilloscope.
20. Press the MAIN/DELAY SELECT button and set SLOPE to Rising.
21. Press the HORIZONTAL MENU button and set DELAY to Off.

Check DC Coupling Bandwidth


Equipment Required: One leveled sine wave generator (item 8), one preci
sion coaxial cable (item 5), and one 50 W termination (item 3).
1. Display the channel to be verified, turning all others off.
2. Connect the output of the sine wave generator to the channel to be
verified as shown in Figure 48.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

417

Performance Tests

Sine Wave Generator

Precision Cable

50 W Termination

Figure 48:Bandwidth Test Setup


3. Press the AUTOSET button.
4. Set the volts/div scale to 2 mV.
5. Set the sec/div scale to 200 ms.
6. Set the sine wave generator for a 50 kHz reference frequency and adjust
the amplitude for a six division display.
7. Press the TRIGGER MENU button and set CPLG to Noise Reject.
8. Use the following substeps (a to c) and the settings and limits given in
Table 43 to confirm the bandwidth of the input channels.
a. Set the volts/div scale as indicated.
b. Set the signal generator for the specified amplitude at the reference
frequency.
c.

While confirming the Display Amplitude remains greater than the


minimum number of divisions, increase the signal generator fre
quency to 60 MHz or 100 MHz, depending on the instrument model.
Table43:DC Coupled Bandwidth
Display Amplitude

Volts/Div
Scale

TAS 455
To 60 MHz

TAS 465
To 100 MHz

2 mV

6 division

w4.2 division

w4.2 division

5 mV

6 division

w4.2 division

w4.2 division

10 mV

6 division

w4.2 division

w4.2 division

20 mV

6 division

w4.2 division

w4.2 division

50 mV

6 division

w4.2 division

w4.2 division

100 mV

6 division

w4.2 division

w4.2 division

1V

418

50 kHz
Reference Amplitude

5 division

w3.5 division

w3.5 division

Performance Verification

Performance Tests

9. Disconnect the test setup from the oscilloscope.


10. Repeat this procedure until all input channels are verified.

Check XAxis Gain


Equipment Required: One pulse generator (item 10) and one precision
coaxial cable (item 5).
1. Display channel 1, turning all others off.
2. Connect the output of the pulse generator to the CH 1 input as shown
Figure 49.
Pulse Generator

Precision Cable

Figure 49:XAxis Gain Test Setup


3. Set the output of the pulse calibration generator for 50 mV.
4. Press the AUTOSET button.
5. Set the volts/div scale to 10 mV.
6. Center the display using the vertical POSITION control.
7. Press the HORIZONTAL MENU button and set XY to On.
8. Check that the amplitude of the Xaxis signal is 4.8 to 5.2 divisions.
9. Set XY to Off.
10. Disconnect the test setup from the oscilloscope.

Horizontal System
Checks

These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the horizontal


system and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in
Section 1, Specifications.

Check Time Base and Time Cursor Accuracy


Equipment Required: One time marker generator (item 9), one precision
coaxial cable (item 5), and one 50 W termination (item 3).
1. Display channel 1, turning all others off.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

419

Performance Tests

2. Connect the output of the time marker generator to the CH 1 input as


shown in Figure 410.
Time Mark Generator

50 W Termination

Precision Cable

Figure 410:Timing Test Setup


3. Set the output of the generator for 20 ns markers.
4. Press the AUTOSET button.
5. Set the sec/div scale to 20 ns.
6. Set the volts/div scale to 500 mV.
7. Center the time mark display vertically.
8. Press the CURSOR button and set DTIME to On.
9. Position the rising edge of the second time mark to the second vertical
graticule line.
10. Align the active cursor to the second time mark at the point the rising
edge intersects the center horizontal graticule line using the General
Purpose Knob.
11. Press the TOGGLE button and align the second cursor to the tenth time
mark at the point the rising edge intersects the center horizontal
graticule line using the General Purpose Knob.
12. Check that the Timemark to Graticule Accuracy and the Time Cursor
Readout Accuracy over the center eight divisions are within the limits
shown for each Sec/Div Scale listed in Table 44.
Table44:Time Base and Cursor Accuracies (Mag Off)
Timemark to
Graticule Accuracy

Time Cursor
Readout Accuracy
2nd and 10th
Time Marks

Sec/Div Scale
(Mag Off)

Over Center
8 Divisions

20 ns

20 ns

0.16 division

157 ns to 163 ns

50 ns

50 ns

0.16 division

392 ns to 408 ns

100 ns

420

Time Mark
Setting

0.1 ms

0.16 division

784 ns to 816 ns

Performance Verification

Performance Tests

Table44:Time Base and Cursor Accuracies (Mag Off) (Cont.)


Timemark to
Graticule Accuracy

Time Cursor
Readout Accuracy

Sec/Div Scale
(Mag Off)

Time Mark
Setting

Over Center
8 Divisions

2nd and 10th


Time Marks

200 ns

0.2 ms

0.16 division

1.57 ms to 1.63 ms

500 ns

0.5 ms

0.16 division

3.92 ms to 4.08 ms

1 ms

1 ms

0.16 division

7.84 ms to 8.16 ms

2 ms

2 ms

0.16 division

15.7 ms to 16.3 ms

5 ms

5 ms

0.16 division

39.2 ms to 40.8 ms

10 ms

10 ms

0.16 division

78.4 ms to 81.6 ms

20 ms

20 ms

0.16 division

157 ms to 163 ms

50 ms

50 ms

0.16 division

392 ms to 408 ms

100 ms

0.1 ms

0.16 division

784 ms to 816 ms

200 ms

0.2 ms

0.16 division

1.57 ms to 1.63 ms

500 ms

0.5 ms

0.16 division

3.92 ms to 4.08 ms

1 ms

1 ms

0.16 division

7.84 ms to 8.16 ms

2 ms

2 ms

0.16 division

15.7 ms to 16.3 ms

5 ms

5 ms

0.16 division

39.2 ms to 40.8 ms

13. Set DTIME to Off.


14. Set the time mark generator to 20 ns.
15. Set the main sec/div scale to 20 ns.
16. Press the HORIZONTAL MENU button and set DELAY to On and MAIN
to Off.
17. Set the delayed sec/div scale to 20 ns.
18. Set the delay time to 3 ns using the General Purpose Knob.
19. Position the edge of the second time mark to the second vertical
graticule line.
20. Check that the Time Mark to Graticule Accuracy over the center eight
divisions are within the limits shown for each sec/div scale listed in
Table 44 (disregard the Time Cursor Readout Accuracy column).
21. Set MAIN to On.
22. Set the main sec/div scale to 20 ns.
23. Set MAIN to Off.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

421

Performance Tests

24. Press the MAG button, turning magnification on.


25. Set the time mark generator for 5 ns markers.
26. Set the volts/div scale to 200 mV.
27. Check that the timing accuracies at the beginning, middle, and end of
sweep over the center eight divisions are within the limits shown for
each of the sec/div scales given in Table 45. Exclude the first and last
five divisions of the magnified sweep for accuracy measurements.
Table45:Time Base Accuracy (Mag On)
Sec/Div Scale
(Mag On)

Time Mark to Graticule


Over Center 8 Divisions

2 ns

5 ns1

0.24 division2

5 ns

5 ns1

0.24 division

10 ns

10 ns

0.24 division

100 ns

0.1 ms

0.24 division

100 ms
1

Time Marker
Setting

0.1 ms

0.24 division

Change the volts/div scale as necessary to maintain vertical amplitude.


this setting, two cycles of the signal are displayed for every five horizontal divisions.

2 At

28. Set MAIN to On and DELAY to Off.


29. Set the sec/div scale to 2 ns.
30. Set the time mark generator for 5 ns markers.
31. Check that the timing accuracies at the beginning, middle, and end of
sweep over the center eight divisions are within the limits shown for
each Sec/Div Scale given in Table 45. Exclude the first and last five
divisions of the magnified sweep for accuracy measurements.
32. Press the MAG button, turning magnification off.

Check Dual Delay Accuracy


Equipment Required: One time marker generator (item 9), one precision
coaxial cable (item 5), and one 50 W termination (item 3).
1. Display channel 1, turning all others off.
2. Connect the output of the time marker generator to the CH 1 input as
shown in Figure 411.

422

Performance Verification

Performance Tests

Time Mark Generator

Precision Cable

50 W Termination

Figure 411:Dual Delay Test Setup


3. Set the output of the time marker generator for 0.5 ms markers.
4. Press the AUTOSET button.
5. Set the sec/div scale to 500 ms.
6. Set the volts/div scale to 500 mV.
7. Position the time marker display to the upper half of the graticule and
align the first time marker to the second vertical graticule line.
8. Press the TRIGGER MENU button and then the MAIN/DELAY SELECT
button.
9. Set MODE to Runs After.
10. Set the delayed sec/div scale to 50 ms.
11. Press HORIZONTAL MENU.
12. Select TRCSEP and position the delayed time marker display to the
lower half of the graticule using the General Purpose Knob.
13. Select DELAY.
14. Using the General Purpose Knob, position the intensified zone on the
main sweep to the second time marker; then, slightly adjust the General
Purpose Knob until the delayed sweep time marker is at the graticule
center.
15. Press the UTILITY button and select CONFIG from the main menu.
16. Select MORE until you can select Dual Delay Enabled from the sub
menu.
17. Press the CURSOR button and set DTIME to On.
18. Using the General Purpose Knob, position the second intensified zone
on the main sweep to the third time marker; then, slightly adjust the
General Purpose Knob to superimpose the delayed sweep time markers
at the graticule center. Press the TOGGLE button to assign the General
Purpose Knob to the second intensified zone if necessary.
19. Check the Dual Delay Accuracy Reading for each time marker pair listed
in Table 46.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

423

Performance Tests

Table46:500 ms Dual Delay Accuracy


Time Markers Intensified

Dual Delay Accuracy


Reading Limits

Second and third

473 ms to 527 ms

Second and fourth

970 ms to 1.03 ms

Second and sixth

1.97 ms to 2.03 ms

Second and tenth

3.96 ms to 4.04 ms

20. Press the MAIN/DELAY SELECT button and set the main sec/div scale
to 200 ns.
21. Press the MAIN/DELAY SELECT button and set the delayed sec/div
scale to 20 ns.
22. Set the time mark generator for 0.2 ms markers.
23. Using the General Purpose Knob, position the second intensified zone
on the main sweep to the tenth time marker; then, slightly adjust the
General Purpose Knob to superimpose the delayed sweep time markers
at the graticule center.
24. Check the dual delay accuracy (DTime) reading is in the range of
1.58 ms to 1.62 ms.
25. Press the CURSOR button and set DTIME to Off.
26. Press the UTILITY button and select Dual Delay Disabled.
27. Press the HORIZONTAL MENU button and set DELAY to Off
28. Disconnect the test setup from the oscilloscope.

Trigger System
Checks

These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the trigger


system and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in
Section 1, Specifications.

Check Trigger Sensitivity


Equipment Required: One sine wave generator (item 8), one 10X attenuator
(item 2), one precision coaxial cable (item 5), one dualinput coupler
(item 7), and two 50 W terminations (item 3).

Low Frequency The following steps check trigger sensitivity at 25 MHz.


1. Display channel 1, turning all others off.
2. Connect the output of the sine wave generator to the CH 1 and
EXT TRIG inputs as shown in Figure 412.

424

Performance Verification

Performance Tests

Sine Wave Generator

50 W Terminations

Precision Cable

Dualinput
Coupler

Figure 412:Trigger Sensitivity Test Setup (One)


3. Set the frequency of the sine wave generator to 25 MHz.
4. Press the AUTOSET button.
5. Set the volts/div scale to 50 mV.
6. Set the sec/div scale to 100 ns.
7. Press the VERTICAL MENU button and set CPLG to DC
8. Press the TRIGGER MENU button and make the following selections
from the main trigger menu:
H

Set MODE to Auto

Set SRC to Ch1

Set CPLG to DC

Set SLOPE to Rising

9. Press the MAIN/DELAY SELECT button and make the following selec
tions from the delay trigger menu:
H

Set MODE to Runs After

Set SRC to Ch1

Set CPLG to DC

Set SLOPE to Rising

10. Set the delayed sec/div scale to 50 ns.


11. Press the HORIZONTAL MENU button and select DELAY.
12. Set the delay time to 15 ns using the General Purpose Knob.
13. Set DELAY to Off.
14. Adjust the sine wave generator amplitude for a three division display.
15. Add a 10X attenuator to the test setup as shown in Figure 413.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

425

Performance Tests

Sine Wave Generator

50 W Terminations

Precision Cable

10X Attenuator

Dualinput
Coupler

Figure 413:Trigger Sensitivity Test Setup (Two)


16. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button and confirm a stable display.
17. Press the TRIGGER MENU button and set SLOPE to Falling.
18. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button and confirm a stable display.
19. Press the HORIZONTAL MENU button and set DELAY to On.
20. Select TRCSEP and position the delayed sweep below the main sweep
using the General Purpose Knob.
21. Press the TRIGGER MENU button and set MODE to Trig After.
22. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button and confirm a stable delayed
sweep display.
23. Set SLOPE to Falling.
24. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button and confirm a stable delayed
sweep display.
25. Press the HORIZONTAL MENU button and set DELAY to Off.
26. Set the volts/div scale to 10 mV.
27. Set the sine wave generator to 50 kHz.
28. Set the sec/div scale to 50 ms.
29. Adjust the sine wave generator amplitude for a 3.5 division display.
30. Set the sine wave generator frequency to 25 MHz.
31. Set the main sec/div scale to 100 ns.
32. Press the TRIGGER MENU button and set SRC to EXT <1>.
33. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button and confirm a stable display.

426

Performance Verification

Performance Tests

High Frequency The following steps check trigger sensitivity at


100 MHz (TAS 455) or 150 MHz (TAS 465).
1. Remove the 10X attenuator from the test setup. Reconnect as shown in
Figure 414.
Sine Wave Generator

50 W Terminations

Dualinput
Coupler

Precision Cable

Figure 414:Trigger Sensitivity Test Setup (Three)


2. Set the volts/div scale to 1 V.
3. Adjust the sine wave generator amplitude for a one division display at
25 MHz.
4. Set the sine wave generator frequency as follows:
H

TAS 455 100 MHz

TAS 465 150 MHz

5. Press the MAG button.


6. Set SRC to EXT <10>.
7. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button and confirm a stable display.
8. Add a 10X attenuator to the test setup as shown in Figure 415.
Sine Wave Generator

50 W Terminations

Precision Cable

10X Attenuator

Dualinput
Coupler

Figure 415:Trigger Sensitivity Test Setup (Four)

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

427

Performance Tests

9. Set the volts/div scale to 50 mV.


10. Adjust the sine wave generator amplitude for a one division display.
11. Set SRC to Ch1.
12. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button and confirm a stable display.
13. Set SLOPE to Rising.
14. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button and confirm a stable display.
15. Press the MAIN/DELAY SELECT button (selecting delay).
16. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button and confirm a stable delayed
sweep display (see the following note).

NOTE
A slight adjustment of the delay time may be necessary to obtain a
stable delayed sweep display. Press the Horizontal Menu button
and adjust the delay time using the General Purpose Knob. Press
the Trigger Menu button after confirming a stable display.
17. Set SLOPE to Rising.
18. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button and confirm a stable delayed
sweep display.

NOTE
A slight adjustment of the delay time may be necessary to obtain a
stable delayed sweep display. Press the Horizontal Menu button
and adjust the delay time using the General Purpose Knob.
19. Press the HORIZONTAL MENU button and set DELAY to Off.
20. Disconnect the test setup from the oscilloscope.

Video Trigger Sensitivity


The following steps check the video trigger sensitivity.
Equipment Required: One NTSC Television signal generator (item 14), one
75 W termination (item 4), and one 75 W coaxial cable (item 6).
1. Display channel 1, turning all others off.
2. Connect the composite sync output of the television signal generator to
the CH 1 input as shown in Figure 416.

428

Performance Verification

Performance Tests

Television Signal Generator

75 W Cable

75 W Termination

Figure 416:Video Trigger Test Setup


3. Press the AUTOSET button.
4. Set the volts/div scale to 200 mV.
5. Set the sec/div scale to 100 ms.
6. Press the UTILITY button and select CONFIG.
7. Select MORE until you can select Video Sync Negative from the sub
menu.
8. Press the TRIGGER MENU button and make the following selections:
H

Set MODE to Video Field <odd>

Set SLOPE to Falling

9. Confirm a stable display of the video field.


10. Set MODE to Video Field <even>.
11. Confirm a stable display of the video field.
12. Disconnect the test setup from the oscilloscope.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

429

Performance Tests

430

Performance Verification

Adjustment Procedures
This section contains information needed to adjust the TAS 455 and
TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes.

Description The Adjustment Procedures are divided into two parts:


H

General information about adjusting the oscilloscope

Written procedures for calibrating the oscilloscope

Purpose Use these procedures to return the oscilloscope to confor

mance with its Warranted Characteristics as listed in Section 1, Specifica


tions. They also optimize the performance of the oscilloscope.
These procedures are not required to verify the oscilloscope conforms with
its warranted characteristics. Performance verification procedures are found
in Section 4, Performance Verification.

Adjustment Interval As a general rule, perform these adjustments after


every 2,000 hours of operation or once a year if used infrequently.

Requirements for
Performance

Before you perform this procedure, you need to address the following
requirements.

Personnel
This procedure is only to be performed by trained service technicians.

Access to Adjustments
The cabinet must be removed to perform the adjustment procedure. Refer to
Section 6, Maintenance, for procedures to remove the cabinet. The adjust
ment procedures make references to adjustments located on internal circuit
boards. Figure 51 shows the location of each board with adjustments. The
end of this section contains figures that show the location of each adjust
ment for each circuit board.

WarmUp Period
This oscilloscope requires a 20 minute warmup period in a 20_ C to 30_ C
environment before performing this adjustment procedure. Adjustments
performed before the operating temperature has stabilized may cause errors
in performance.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

51

Adjustment Procedures

Display Driver board

Analog board

Figure 51:Location of Boards for Adjustments

Equipment Required

These procedures use external, traceable signal sources to adjust the


TAS 455 and TAS 465 Oscilloscopes. Table 41 on page 414 lists all the test
equipment required for these procedures.

Performing the
Adjustment
Procedures

The following topics cover what is required to adjust the oscilloscope. Also,
the performance of individual adjustments is discussed.

52

The Factory Horizontal Cal and Factory Vertical Cal adjustment routines
are selected from the Utility menu of the oscilloscope. These routines use
both frontpanel controls and external standards you provide in response to
instructions displayed on the CRT readout.

Adjustment Procedures

Adjustment Procedures

Complete Adjustment
A complete adjustment consists of a sequence of individual adjustment
steps performed in the order shown:
1. Power Supply Adjustment
2. CRT Adjustment
3. Low Frequency Output Compensation
4. Factory Horizontal Cal
5. Factory Vertical Cal
6. High Frequency Step Response Adjustment
7. Attenuator Compensation
8. Vertical Gain Adjustment

Partial Adjustment
The Adjustment Procedures allow you to make individual adjustments of the
steps outlined above; however, usually all adjustment steps are made. Read
the information under Adjustment Dependencies that follows before perform
ing an individual adjustment.

Adjustment Dependencies
Some adjustments depend on the successful prior completion of other
adjustments. Generally, the procedures should be performed in the order
shown under Complete Adjustment. Some adjustments do not depend on
completion of other adjustments. Table 51 lists the adjustments and their
dependencies.
Table51:Adjustments and Dependencies
Adjustment

Prior Completion Requirements

Power Supply

None

CRT Adjustment

None

Low Frequency Output Com


pensation

None

Factory Horizontal Cal

CRT Adjustment

Factory Vertical Cal

Low Frequency Output Compensation


and Factory Horizontal Cal

High Frequency Step Response

Factory Vertical Cal

Attenuator Compensation

Low Frequency Output Compensation

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

53

Adjustment Procedures

Table51:Adjustments and Dependencies (Cont.)


Adjustment
Vertical Gain Adjustment

Adjustment
Instructions

Prior Completion Requirements


Low Frequency Output Compensa
tion, Factory Vertical Cal, and Attenu
ator Compensation

The following instructions will guide you through each of the adjustments
outlined in Complete Adjustments. Each adjustment section lists all neces
sary equipment required to perform the adjustments.

Power Supply Adjustment


(New Style Power Supply)
This procedure is provided to support instruments with the newer power
supply. No adjustment is necessary with older power supplies. Refer to
page38 for details.
Equipment Required: One digital multimeter (item 13) and one adjustment
tool (item 15).
Adjustment Locations: This procedure requires adjustment to the Power
Supply board. See Figure 516 on page 521 for the location of the adjust
ment.
1. Connect the digital voltmeter low lead to chassis ground and connect
the volts lead to the -8.6 V supply (W55-2) on the CPU board.
2. Measure the -8.6 V supply. If the supply measures from -8.56 V to
-8.64 V, the supply is adjusted properly and you may disconnect the
voltmeter.
3. If the power supply is not within the limits specified in step 2, adjust the
-8.6 V ADJ potentiometer (R43) for a voltmeter reading of -8.60 V.
4. Disconnect the voltmeter from the instrument.

CRT Adjustments
Equipment Required: One time marker generator (item 9), one precision
coaxial cable (item 5), and one 50 W termination (item 3).
Adjustment Locations: This procedure requires adjustments to the Display
Driver board. See Figure 514 on page 519 for the location of the adjust
ments.
1. Disconnect all signal inputs from the oscilloscope.
2. Display channel 1, turning all others off.
3. Press the AUTOSET button.

54

Adjustment Procedures

Adjustment Procedures

4. Set the volts/div scale to 50 mV.


5. Set the sec/div scale to 2 ms.
6. Press the VERTICAL MENU button and make the following selections
from the menu:
H

Set CPLG to GND

Set BW to 20 MHz

7. Position the channel 1 trace to the center horizontal graticule line and
adjust the FOCUS control for a welldefined display.
8. Adjust the TRACE ROTATION control (screwdriver adjustment) to align
the trace with the center horizontal graticule line.
9. Press the HORIZONTAL MENU button and set XY to On.
10. Set the INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise (off).
11. Adjust R321 on the Display Driver board until the dot is visible, then
readjust R321 until the dot just extinguishes.
12. Set XY to Off.
13. Connect the output of the time mark generator to the CH 1 input as
shown in Figure 52.

Time Mark Generator

50 W Termination
Precision Cable

Figure 52:CRT Adjustments Calibration Setup


14. Set the time mark generator for 1 ms markers.
15. Set the INTENSITY control to view the display.
16. Press the VERTICAL MENU button and set CPLG to DC
17. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button.
18. Adjust the FOCUS and R322 on the Display Driver board for the best
focus of the time mark display and readout display.
19. Set the vertical POSITION control counterclockwise, moving the base
line of the time mark display down off the graticule area.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

55

Adjustment Procedures

20. Set the READOUT INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise (off).


21. Adjust R323 on the Display Driver for the best geometry (minimum
bowing) of the time mark display across the entire graticule area.
22. Set the READOUT INTENSITY control to view the readout.
23. Disconnect the calibration setup from the oscilloscope.

Low Frequency Output Compensation


Equipment Required: One pulse generator (item 10), one precision coaxial
cable (item 5), one 50 W termination (item 3), and one dualinput coupler
(item 7).
Adjustment Locations: This procedure requires adjustments to the Display
Driver board. See Figure 514 on page 519 for the location of the adjust
ments.
1. Display channel 1, turning all others off.
2. Press the AUTOSET button.
3. Set the volts/div scale to 50 mV.
4. Set the sec/div scale to 1 ms.
5. Press the ALT/CHOP ADD button and set DISP to Alt.
,
6. Press the VERTICAL MENU button and set CPLG to AC.
7. Connect the positive fast rise pulse output of the pulse generator to the
CH 1 and CH 2 input connectors as shown in Figure 53.

Pulse Generator

50 W Termination

Dualinput
Coupler

Precision Cable

Figure 53:Low Frequency Output Compensation Calibration Setup


8. Set the pulse generator for fast rise period of 1 ms and a 4 division
display.
9. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button.

56

Adjustment Procedures

Adjustment Procedures

10. Press the CURSOR button and set DVOLT to On.


11. Set the cursors 5 divisions apart using the General Purpose Knob and
the TOGGLE button.
12. Set the volts/div scale to 20 mV.
13. Press the CH 2 button.
14. Set the channel 2 volts/div scale to 20 mV.
15. Press the VERTICAL MENU button and make the following selections
from the menu (channel 2):
H

Set CPLG to GND

Set VAR to Off

Set INV to Off

Set BW to Full

16. Position the channel 2 trace to the center vertical graticule line.
17. Set CPLG to AC.
18. Adjust R111 located on the Display Driver board for minimum vertical
movement of the readout (over the entire graticule area).
19. Disconnect the test setup from the oscilloscope.

Factory Horizontal Cal


Equipment Required: One time mark generator (item 9), one precision
coaxial cable (item 5), and one 50 W termination (item 3).
Prerequisites: CRT adjustment procedure.

NOTE
To enable factory calibration on oscilloscopes with firmware version
2.10 or above, remove jumper J205 (CAL-DIS) on the CPU board.
(See Figure 517 on page 522 for the location of J205.) If you do
not remove this jumper, the message See manual to enable Facto
ry Cal" appears when you select the factory calibration routine.
Firmware versions below 2.10 do not have the calibration lockout
feature and the factory calibration routine can still execute with J205
installed.
1. Disconnect all signal inputs from the oscilloscope.
2. Press the UTILITY button to display the Utility menu.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

57

Adjustment Procedures

CAUTION

To avoid replacing the calibration constants with erroneous values,


be sure to complete all steps of this procedure after initiating the
calibration routine.
3. Select CAL from the main menu.
4. Select Factory Horizontal Cal, initiating the calibration routine.
This routine takes about 20 seconds to complete its initial calibrations.
Once complete, 2 dots are displayed and the message Toggle to set
8div about center" appears. The displayed dots are used for the next
horizontal calibration steps.

NOTE
The following steps use both the General Purpose Knob and the
TOGGLE button to make adjustments. The General Purpose Knob
performs two functions: to adjust horizontal gain and centering. The
TOGGLE button selects the function of the General Purpose Knob.
5. Use a combination of the TOGGLE button and the General Purpose
Knob to position the dots 8 divisions apart, centered horizontally (see
Figure 54).
6. Select Done when you have the appropriate display.

Gain and Position


Adjustment

Dots Eight Divisions


Apart, Centered
Horizontally

Toggle Between
Gain and Position
Adjustment

Figure 54:Horizontal Adjustments (One)


7. Again, use a combination of the TOGGLE button and the General Pur
pose Knob to position the dots 8 divisions apart, centered horizontally
(see Figure 54).

58

Adjustment Procedures

Adjustment Procedures

8. Select Done when you have the appropriate display.


9. One dot is displayed.
10. Use a combination of the TOGGLE button and the General Purpose
Knob to center the single dot at the center of the screen (see
Figure 55).

Position
Adjustment
Center Dot
Horizontally

Toggle Dot Position

Figure 55:Horizontal Adjustments (Two)


11. Continue to press the TOGGLE button and adjusting the dot to center
screen with the General Purpose Knob until the dot stays centered while
pressing the TOGGLE button.
12. Select Done when you have the appropriate display.
13. Two vertical cursor lines are displayed.
14. Use a combination of the TOGGLE button and the General Purpose
Knob to position the vertical lines 8 divisions apart, centered horizontally
(see Figure 56).

Gain and Position


Adjustment
Lines Eight Divisions
Apart, Centered
Horizontally
Toggle Between
Gain and Position
Adjustment

Figure 56:Horizontal Adjustments (Three)

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

59

Adjustment Procedures

15. Select Done with the menu button when you have the appropriate
display.

NOTE
At this time, the calibration routine can be terminated by selecting
Abort instead of Done. The abort option appears through the
remainder of this Factory Horizontal Cal routine.
16. Select Done to continue or Abort to terminate the calibration routine.
17. Connect the output of the time mark generator to the CH 1 input as
shown in Figure 57.
Time Mark Generator

Precision Cable

50 W Termination

Figure 57:Horizontal Output Calibration Setup


18. Set the time mark generator for 5 ns markers.
19. Select Done when completed.
20. Adjust the 5 ns main sweep accuracy by performing these substeps.
a. Using the General Purpose Knob, adjust the display for 1 time
marker per division over the center 8 divisions.
b. Select Done when adjusted.
21. Adjust the 5 ns delay sweep accuracy by performing these substeps.
a. Using the General Purpose Knob, adjust the display for 1 time
marker per division over the center 8 divisions.
b. Select Done when adjusted.
22. Adjust the 2 ns main sweep accuracy by performing these substeps.
a. Using the General Purpose Knob, adjust the display for 2 time
markers per 5 divisions over the center 8 divisions.
b. Select Done when adjusted.
23. Adjust the 2 ns delay sweep accuracy by performing these substeps.

510

Adjustment Procedures

Adjustment Procedures

a. Using the General Purpose Knob, adjust the display for 2 time
markers per 5 divisions over the center 8 divisions.
b. Select Done when adjusted; a Cal Passed message appears.
24. Select Done to exit the routine.
25. Disconnect the test setup from the oscilloscope.
26. If you do not intend to proceed with Factory Vertical CAL, replace J205
(CAL-DIS) to lock out the calibration routine. (This jumper only works
with firmware version 2.10 and above.)

CAUTION

To prevent accidental loss of calibration, be sure the calibration


lockout jumper (J205) is in place. If J205 is not in place, erroneous
calibration constants can result if the calibration routine is acciden
tally invoked and not properly completed.

Factory Vertical Cal


Equipment Required: One DC calibration generator (item 11), one preci
sion coaxial cable (item 5), and one dualinput coupler (item 7).
Prerequisites: Low Frequency Output Compensation adjustment and Self
Cal Horizontal adjustment procedures.

NOTE
To enable factory calibration on oscilloscopes with firmware version
2.10 or above, remove jumper J205 (CAL-DIS) on the CPU board.
(See Figure 517 on page 522 for the location of J205.) If you do
not remove this jumper, the message See manual to enable Facto
ry Cal" appears when you select the factory calibration routine.
Firmware versions below 2.10 do not have the calibration lockout
feature and the factory calibration routine can still execute with J205
installed.
1. Press the UTILITY button.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

511

Adjustment Procedures

CAUTION

To avoid replacing the calibration constants with erroneous values,


be sure to complete all steps of this procedure after initiating the
calibration routine.
2. Select CAL from the main menu.
3. Select Factory Vertical Cal, initiating the calibration routine.
The calibration routine displays user prompts onscreen throughout this
procedure.

NOTE
At this time, the calibration routine can be terminated by selecting
Abort. The abort option appears through the remainder of this
Factory Vertical Cal routine.
4. Set the DC calibration generator for 10 VDC output and connect to the
CH 1 and CH 2 inputs as shown in Figure 58.

DC Calibration Generator

Precision Cable

Dualinput
Coupler

Figure 58:Factory Vertical Calibration Setup


5. Select Done when completed.
6. Set the DC calibration generator for 1 VDC output.
7. Select Done when completed.
8. Set the DC calibration generator for 100 mVDC output.
9. Select Done when completed.
10. Disconnect the test setup.
11. Select Done when completed.
This portion of the routine takes about one minute to complete.

512

Adjustment Procedures

Adjustment Procedures

12. Connect the DC calibration generator to the EXT TRIG input as shown
in Figure 59.

DC Calibration Generator

Precision Cable

Figure 59:External Trigger Calibration Setup


13. Set the DC calibration generator for 500 mVDC output.
14. Select Done when completed.
15. Set the DC calibration generator for 5 VDC output.
16. Select Done when completed.

NOTE
The following steps use both the General Purpose Knob and the
TOGGLE button to make adjustments. The General Purpose Knob
performs two functions: adjust horizontal gain and centering. The
TOGGLE button selects the function of the General Purpose Knob.
17. Use a combination of the TOGGLE button and the General Purpose
Knob to position the dots 6 divisions apart, centered horizontally (see
Figure 510).

Dots Six Divisions


Apart, Centered
Horizontally

Gain and Position


Adjustment

Toggle Between
Gain and Position
Adjustment

Figure 510:Vertical Adjustments

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

513

Adjustment Procedures

18. Select Done when you have the appropriate display.


19. Adjust R112 (vertical gain) and R154 (vertical centering) on the Display
Driver board, setting the horizontal cursors 6 divisions apart, centered
vertically (see Figure 511).

Lines Six Divisions


Apart, Centered
Vertically

Figure 511:Adjusting Vertical Gain and Centering


20. Select Done when you have completed the adjustments.
21. Select Done again to exit the routine.
22. Replace J205 (CAL-DIS) to lock out the calibration routine. (This jumper
only works with firmware version 2.10 and above.)

CAUTION

To prevent accidental loss of calibration, be sure the calibration


lockout jumper (J205) is in place. If J205 is not in place, erroneous
calibration constants can result if the calibration routine is acciden
tally invoked and not properly completed.

High Frequency Step Response


Equipment Required: One pulse generator (item 10), one precision coaxial
cable (item 5), one 5X attenuator (item 1), and one 50 W termination (item 3).
Adjustment Locations: This procedure requires adjustments to the Display
Driver board. See Figure 514 on page 519 for the location of the adjust
ments.
Prerequisites: Factory Vertical Cal adjustment procedure.
1. Display channel 1, turning all others off.

514

Adjustment Procedures

Adjustment Procedures

2. Connect the positive fast rise pulse output of the pulse generator to the
CH 1 input as shown in Figure 512.

Pulse Generator

50 W Termination
Precision Cable

5X Attenuator

Figure 512:High Frequency Step Response Test Setup


3. Set the pulse generator fast rise period to 1 ms and pulse amplitude to
midrange.
4. Press the AUTOSET button.
5. Set the volts/div scale to 10 mV.
6. Set the sec/div scale to 200 ns.
7. Press the VERTICAL MENU button and set CPLG to DC.
8. Adjust the vertical POSITION control and the generator pulse amplitude
to obtain a 5 division, vertically centered, display.
9. TAS 465 Only Adjust R141 and C122 on the Display Driver board for
flattest long term response of the pulse front corner.
10. Set the sec/div scale to 20 ns.
11. Adjust R140 and C121 on the Display Driver board for minimum signal
aberrations of the pulse front corner.

NOTE
Some interaction of the adjustments made in steps 9 and 11 may
occur. For optimum oscilloscope performance, these steps should
be rechecked after making adjustments.
12. Disconnect the calibration setup from the oscilloscope.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

515

Adjustment Procedures

Attenuator Compensation
Equipment Required: One pulse generator (item 10), one precision coaxial
cable (item 5), one 50 W termination (item 3), and one dualinput coupler
(item 7).
Adjustment Locations: This procedure requires adjustments to the Analog
board. See Figure 515 on page 520 for the location of the adjustments.
Prerequisites: Low Frequency Output Compensation adjustment proce
dure.
1. Display channel 1, turning all others off.
2. Connect the high amplitude output of the pulse generator to the CH 1
and CH 2 inputs as shown in Figure 513.

Pulse Generator

Dualinput
Coupler

50 W Termination
Precision Cable

Figure 513:Attenuator Compensation Test Setup


3. Set the pulse generator high amplitude period to 1 ms.
4. Press the AUTOSET button.
5. Press the VERTICAL MENU button and set CPLG to DC.
6. Set the volts/div scale to 200 mV.
7. Set the sec/div scale to 200 ms.
8. Using the vertical POSITION control and the generator pulse amplitude,
obtain a 5 division, vertically centered display of channel 1.
9. Set the volts/div scale to 100 mV.
10. Press the CH 2 button.
11. Press the VERTICAL MENU button and make the following selections
from the menu:
H
H

516

Set CPLG to DC
Set VAR to Off

Adjustment Procedures

Adjustment Procedures

Set INV to Off

Set BW to Full

Set the volts/div scale to 100 mV

Position the channel 2 display approximately 0.5 divisions below the


channel 1 display

12. Press the CH 1 button.


13. Adjust Ch 1 10X on the Analog board for the flattest response of the
most positive portion of the channel 1 waveform.
14. Set the channel 1 volts/div scale to 1 V.
15. Press the CH 2 button.
16. Adjust Ch 2 10X adjustment on the Analog board for the flattest re
sponse of the most positive portion of the channel 2 waveform.
17. Set the channel 2 volts/div scale to 1 V.
18. Set the pulse generator amplitude to maximum.
19. Adjust Ch 2 100X on the Analog board for the flattest response of the
channel 2 waveform.
20. Adjust Ch 1 100X on the Analog board for the flattest response of the
channel 1 waveform.
21. Disconnect the test setup from the oscilloscope.

Vertical Gain Adjust (Cabinet On)


Equipment Required: None.
Adjustment Locations: This procedure requires adjustments to the Display
Driver board. See Figure 514 on page 519 for the location of the adjust
ments.
Prerequisites: Low Frequency Output Compensation, Factory Vertical Cal,
and Attenuator Compensation adjustment procedures.
1. Slide the cabinet on the instrument and allow a 20minute warm up.
2. Press the CURSOR button and set DVOLT to On.
3. Set the volts/div scale to 1 V.
4. Position the cursors 6 divisions apart, centered vertically and check that
the DVolts readout is between 5.96 V and 6.04 V.

NOTE
If the readout in step 4 is within the limits given, stop here. The
calibration is complete.
If the readout is outside the limits, continue with this procedure.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

517

Adjustment Procedures

5. Adjust the cursors until the DVolts readout is 6 V.


6. Note the cursor display error (are the cursors more or less than six
divisions apart).
7. Slide the cabinet off the instrument and adjust R112 on the Display
Driver board to compensate for the display error noted in step 6.
For example, if you noted in step 6 that with the DVolts readout at 6 V,
the cursor display equaled 6.2 divisions. Compensate by adjusting the
cursor display to 5.8 divisions with R112.
8. Slide the cabinet on the instrument and repeat this procedure until the
cursor display matches the DVolts readout.

Adjustment Complete
The adjustment procedure is complete. Install the cabinet and rear cover.

518

Adjustment Procedures

Adjustment Procedures

R321
R322

R323

R140
C121

R112

C122
R141

R154

R111

Figure 514:Display Driver Board Adjustment Locations

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

519

Adjustment Procedures

Ch1 10X

Ch1 100X

Ch2 10X

Ch2 100X

Figure 515:Analog Board Adjustment Locations

520

Adjustment Procedures

Adjustment Procedures

R43

Figure 516:Power Supply Adjustment Location (New Power Supply)

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

521

Adjustment Procedures

J205 (CAL-DIS)

Figure 517:Location of J205 (CAL-DIS) on the CPU Board

522

Adjustment Procedures

Maintenance Information
This section contains the information needed to do periodic maintenance on
the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes:
H

Inspection and Cleaning Information and procedures for inspecting


the oscilloscope and cleaning its external and internal modules.

Removal and Installation Procedures Procedures for removing and


installing the modules, circuit boards, and mechanical parts.

Before Servicing

Maintenance Information This subsection. It includes this introduc


tion, servicing information, plus general information on preventing dam
age to internal modules when doing maintenance.

Troubleshooting Aids Procedures that help isolate problems to a


module.

This manual is for servicing of the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscillo
scopes. To prevent injury to yourself or damage to the oscilloscope, do the
following before you attempt service.
H

Be sure you are a qualified service person.

Read the Safety Summary found at the beginning of this manual.

When using this manual for servicing, be sure to heed all warnings, cau
tions, and notes.

Tektronix Service

Tektronix provides service to cover repair under warranty as well as other


services that may provide a costeffective answer to your service needs.
Whether providing warranty repair service or any of the other services listed
below, Tektronix service technicians, trained on Tektronix products, are best
equipped to service your TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes.
Tektronix technicians are apprised of the latest information on improvements
to the product as well as the latest new options.

Warranty Service
Tektronix warrants this product for three years from date of purchase, ex
cluding probes for which the warranty is one year. Tektronix technicians
provide warranty service at most Tektronix service locations worldwide. Your
Tektronix product catalog lists all service locations worldwide.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

61

Maintenance Information

Repair or Calibration Service


Tektronix offers several types of service contracts that you may purchase to
tailor repair and/or calibration of your TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscillo
scopes to fit your requirements.
Refer to the WarrantyPlus Service Options, page 71, for a list of the avail
able service contracts for the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes.

Self Service

This manual contains all the information needed for periodic maintenance
and repair of the TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes.
For periodic maintenance, use these sections:
H

Performance verification procedures

Adjustment procedures

For instrument repair, use these sections:


H

Troubleshooting aids to help isolate problems to a module

Disassembly procedures

Electrical schematics

Parts lists

Replace failed modules with fully tested modules obtained from the factory.
Schematics of each module are provided for repair to the component level
of the circuit boards where feasible.

For information, contact your local Tektronix service center or sales engi
neer on any repair services.

Preventing ESD

When performing any service which requires internal access to the oscillo
scope, adhere to the following precautions to avoid damaging internal
modules and their components due to electrostatic discharge (ESD).

CAUTION

Static discharge can damage any semiconductor component in this


oscilloscope.
1. Minimize handling of staticsensitive modules.
2. Discharge the static voltage from your body by wearing a grounded
antistatic wrist strap while handling these modules. All service must be
done at a staticfree work station.

62

Maintenance

Maintenance Information

3. Do not remove the oscilloscope cabinet unless you have met precaution
number 2, above. Consider all internal modules static sensitive.
4. Remove anything capable of generating or holding a static charge from
the work station surface.
5. Do not slide the modules over any surface.
6. Do not use highvelocity compressed air when cleaning dust from
modules.
Table 61 lists the relative susceptibility of various classes of semiconduc
tors. Static voltages of 1 kV to 30 kV are common in unprotected environ
ments.
Table61:Relative Susceptibility to StaticDischarge Damage
Semiconductor Classes

Relative
Susceptibility
Levels1

MOS or CMOS microcircuits or discrete circuits, or lin


ear microcircuits with MOS inputs (most sensitive)

ECL

Schottky signal diodes

Schottky TTL

Highfrequency bipolar transistors

JFET

Linear microcircuits

Lowpower Schottky TTL

TTL (least sensitive)

1Voltage equivalent for levels (voltage discharged from a 100pF capacitor through resis
tance of 100 ohms):
1=100 to 500 V
6 = 600 to 800 V
2 = 200 to 500 V
7 = 400 to 1000 V (est.)
3 = 250 V
8 = 900 V
4 = 500 V
9 = 1200 V
5 = 400 to 600 V

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

63

Maintenance Information

64

Maintenance

Inspection and Cleaning


Inspection and Cleaning describes how to inspect and clean the TAS 455
and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes. Inspection and cleaning are preventive
maintenance. Preventive maintenance, when done regularly, may prevent
oscilloscope malfunction and enhance its reliability.
Preventive maintenance consists of visually inspecting and cleaning the
oscilloscope and using general care when operating it.
How often to do maintenance depends on the severity of the environment in
which you use the oscilloscope. A proper time to perform preventive mainte
nance is just before oscilloscope adjustment.

General Care

The cabinet helps keep dust out of the oscilloscope and it is a major compo
nent of its cooling system. It should normally be in place when operating the
oscilloscope. The oscilloscope front cover protects the front panel and
display from dust and damage. Install it when storing or transporting the
oscilloscope.

Inspection and
Cleaning Procedures

Inspect and clean the oscilloscope as often as operating conditions require.


The collection of dirt on components inside can cause them to overheat and
breakdown. (Dirt acts as an insulating blanket, preventing efficient heat
dissipation.) Dirt also provides an electrical conduction path that could cause
an oscilloscope failure, especially under highhumidity conditions.

CAUTION

Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents that might damage the
plastics used in this oscilloscope. Use a 75% isopropyl alcohol
solution as a cleaner and rinse with deionized water. Use only
deionized water when cleaning the menu buttons or frontpanel
buttons. Before using any other type of cleaner, consult your Tektro
nix Service Center or representative.
Avoid the use of high pressure compressed air when cleaning dust
from the interior of this instrument. (High pressure air can cause
ESD.) Instead, use low pressure compressed air (about 9 psi).

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

65

Inspection and Cleaning

Inspection Exterior
Inspect the outside of the oscilloscope for damage, wear, and missing parts.
Use Table 62 as a guide. Oscilloscopes that appear to have been dropped
or otherwise abused should be checked thoroughly to verify correct opera
tion and performance. Repair defects that could cause personal injury or
lead to further damage to the oscilloscope immediately.
Table62:External Inspection Check List
Item

Inspect For

Repair Action

Cabinet, front panel,


and cover

Cracks, scratches, deformations,


damaged hardware or gaskets.

Replace defective module.

Frontpanel knobs

Missing, damaged, or loose knobs.

Repair or replace missing or defective knobs.

Connectors

Broken shells, cracked insulation,


and deformed contacts. Dirt in con
nectors.

Replace defective modules. Clear or wash out


dirt.

Carrying handle and


cabinet feet

Correct operation.

Repair or replace defective module.

Accessories

Missing items or parts of items, bent


pins, broken or frayed cables, and
damaged connectors.

Replace damaged or missing items.

Cleaning Procedure Exterior


1. Remove loose dust on the outside of the oscilloscope with a lint free
cloth.
2. Remove remaining dirt with a lint free cloth dampened in a general pur
pose detergentandwater solution. Do not use abrasive cleaners.

CAUTION

To prevent getting moisture inside the oscilloscope during external


cleaning, use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator.
3. Clean the CRT screen with a lintfree cloth dampened with either a
75% isopropyl alcohol solution or, preferably, a gentle, general purpose
detergentandwater solution.

NOTE
If the CRT Implosion Shield needs further cleansing, refer to the
procedure on page 67.

66

Maintenance

Inspection and Cleaning

Cleaning Procedure Interior


If, after doing steps 1 and 2, a module is clean upon inspection, skip
the remaining steps.
1. Blow off dust with dry, lowpressure, deionized air (approximately 9 psi).
2. Remove any remaining dust with a lint free cloth dampened in isopropyl
alcohol (75% solution) and rinse with a warm deionized water. (A
cottontipped applicator is useful for cleaning in narrow spaces and on
circuit boards.)
3. If steps 1 and 2 do not remove all the dust or dirt, the oscilloscope may
be spray washed using a solution of 75% isopropyl alcohol by doing
steps 4 through 8.
4. Gain access to the parts to be cleaned by removing easily accessible
shields and panels (see Removal and Installation Procedures).
5. Spray wash dirty parts with the isopropyl alcohol solution and wait
60 seconds for the majority of the alcohol to evaporate.
6. Use hot (+50_C to +60_C) deionized water to thoroughly rinse them.
7. Dry all parts with lowpressure, deionized air.
8. Dry all components and assemblies in an oven or drying compartment
using lowtemperature (+50_C to +60_C) circulating air.

Cleaning the CRT Implosion Shield


This procedure describes how to clean both sides of the CRT Implo
sion Shield, thus requiring its removal. Perform this procedure only if
cleaning the backside of the Implosion Shield is necessary.
1. Remove the Implosion Shield as described in the removal and replace
ment procedures beginning on page 628.
2. Clean the shield with a lint free cloth dampened in a general purpose
detergentandwater solution. Do not use abrasive cleaners.
3. Remove any static charge that may have accumulated by holding the
shield in a deionized air flow.
4. Install the shield as described in the removal and replacement proce
dures beginning on page 628.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

67

Inspection and Cleaning

68

Maintenance

Removal and Installation Procedures


This subsection contains procedures for removal and installation of all
replaceable mechanical and electrical modules. Replaceable mechanical
and electrical modules are listed in Sections 8 and 10 of this manual.

Preparation
Please Read

WARNING
Before doing this or any other procedure in this manual, read the
Safety Summary found at the beginning of this manual. Also, to
prevent possible injury to service personnel or damage to
oscilloscope components, read Installation and Power On in
Section 2, and Preventing ESD in this section.
This subsection contains the following items:
H

This preparatory information that you need to properly do the


procedures that follow.

A list of equipment required to remove and disassemble all modules.

Procedures for removal and reinstallation of the electrical and


mechanical modules.

Three module locator diagrams for finding all the modules in this
oscilloscope. (See Figures 62, 63, and 64.)

WARNING
Before doing any procedure in this subsection, disconnect the
power cord from the line voltage source. Failure to do so could
cause serious injury or death.

Cable Removal
Cables are partially or completely removed in the course of removing a
board or module they plug into.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

69

Removal and Installation Procedures

General Instructions
READ THESE GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE REMOVING A
MODULE.
First read over the Summary of Procedures that follows to under
stand how the procedures are grouped. Then read Equipment
Required for a list of the tools needed to remove and install modules
in this oscilloscope.
Procedures refer to the front," rear," top," and other portions of
the oscilloscope. Figure 61 illustrates these references.

Figure 61:Oscilloscope Orientation

Summary of Procedures
The procedures are described in the order in which they appear in this
section. In addition, you can look up any procedure for removal and reinstal
lation of any module in the Table of Contents of this manual.

Equipment Required Table 63 lists the tools required to completely


disassemble the oscilloscope into its modules.

All the tools are standard tools readily available from tool suppliers.

610

Maintenance

Removal and Installation Procedures

Table63:Tools Required for Module Removal


Item No.

Name

Description

Screwdriver handle

Accepts TorxRdriver bits.

T15 Torx tip

TorxRdriver bit for T15 size screw heads.

T20 Torx tip

TorxRdriver bit for T20 size screw heads. Used only for remov
al of the cabinet handle.

Nut driver, 5/16 inch

Used for removing the CRT earth ground cable.

Angletip tweezers

Used for knob and shaft removal.

Flatbladed spudger

A nonmetallic probelike tool with a flat bladed tip. Used to


remove the frontpanel trim and front module.

SlipJaw Pliers

Used for removing the front feet from the cabinet.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

611

Removal and Installation Procedures

Line Cord

Rear Cover
Cabinet
Mounting
Screw

Handle
Assembly

Front
Foot (2)

Line Fuse

Menu Flex
Circuit
Menu Button
Elastomer

Menu Button
Trim Ring
Front Cover
(Optional)

A4 Front Panel
Assembly

FrontPanel
Knobs & Shafts

Figure 62:Cabinet and FrontPanel Mounted Modules

612

Maintenance

Removal and Installation Procedures

Rear CRT Bracket


Fan Mount
Fan
MU Shield

Mounting Screw
Power Supply

CRT

CPU Board

Implosion Shield
Front CRT Bracket

Mounting Screw

Display Board

Display Control Board

Mounting Screw

High Voltage Cover


Attenuator
Assembly
Mounting Screw
Attenuator
Shield

Figure 63:Internal Modules

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

613

Removal and Installation Procedures

Power Supply to CPU


Power Supply to
Display Board

Display Control Board


to Front Panel

Display Board to
Analog Board

Display Control Board


to Display Board

Display Board to
Analog Board

CPU to Analog Board


CPU to Front Panel

Power Supply to
Display Board

Figure 64:Cables and Cable Routing

Line Cord and Line


Fuse

The following procedures describe how to remove and install the line cord
and line fuse located on the back side of the oscilloscope.

WARNING
Unplug the line cord from the line voltage power source before
continuing. Failure to do so can cause injury or death.
Prepare the oscilloscope by positioning the bottom side down on the work
surface and facing the back side toward you. Refer to Figure 65.

Line Cord
1. Unplug the line cord from the power source.
2. Unplug the other end of the line cord from the back of the oscilloscope.
3. Grasp the end of the line cord and retaining clamp and rotate them
90 degrees counterclockwise (Figure 65).
4. Pull the line cord and clamp away from the back of the oscilloscope.

614

Maintenance

Removal and Installation Procedures

5. Perform this procedure in reverse order to install the power cord on the
oscilloscope.

Line Fuse
1. Unplug the line cord from the power source.
2. Pull out the fuse holder drawer and remove the fuse (Figure 65).
3. Perform this procedure in reverse order to install the fuse.
Line Fuse

(1) Unplug
(2) Rotate

(3) Pull

Figure 65:Line Fuse and Line Cord Removal

FrontPanel Knobs
and Shafts

Use the following procedures to remove and install frontpanel knobs and
shafts.
Prepare the oscilloscope by setting it bottom side down on the work surface
and facing the front side toward you.

Removing FrontPanel Knobs and Shafts


1. Remove any knob by pulling it straight out from the front panel slightly.
This will create some clearance between the base of the knob and the
front panel to create some clearance between the base of the knob and
the front panel.
2. Insert the tweezers between the knob and front panel and use them to
remove the knob and attaching shaft (see Figure 66).

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

615

Removal and Installation Procedures

3. Pull the shaft out of the knob to separate the two pieces.

Installing FrontPanel Knobs and Shafts


1. Align the inside of the knob to the end of the shaft and push it in until it
snaps.
2. Insert the shaft of the assembly into the proper hole on the front panel
and push it in until it stops.
3. Lightly push in the knob and rotate it until the shaft slips into place.
4. Push the knob all the way in to seat the assembly.

When reinstalling the


knobs, note there are two
sizes. Be sure to reinstall
the proper size knob in the
proper location.

Figure 66:Knob and Shaft Removal

616

Maintenance

Removal and Installation Procedures

Feet, Rear Cover, and


Cabinet

Before removing the rear cover or cabinet, install the optional front cover on
the front panel of the oscilloscope (if available) and then position the oscillo
scope as indicated in Figure 67.

Mounting Screws (4)

Mounting Screw

Front Foot: Rotate


and remove.

Figure 67:Rear Cover, Cabinet, and Feet Removal

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

617

Removal and Installation Procedures

Rear Cover
1. Position the oscilloscope as indicated in Figure 67.
2. Use the screwdriver to remove the four T15 Torx screws that secure the
rear cover to the oscilloscope.
3. Lift off the rear cover. Do these steps in reverse order to install the rear
cover.

Cabinet
1. Remove the rear cover.
2. Remove the single T15 Torx screw on the left side of the oscilloscope.
3. Grasp the two handle hubs and pull them outward as if to rotate the
handle.
4. While holding the handle hubs out, lift the cabinet up and slide it off the
oscilloscope. Take care not to bind or snag the cabinet on the internal
cabling as you remove it.

Replacing the Front Feet


If you are replacing a front foot, use a pair of slipjaw pliers to firmly grip the
foot, then pull with a turning motion to remove. Do this step in reverse order
to replace the foot.

FrontPanel Trim,
Menu and Power
Buttons

Use the following procedures to remove and install the frontpanel trim, and
buttons. Refer to Figure 68.

Additional procedures required These procedures require that the


following procedures be performed first:
H

Rear Cover Removal

Cabinet Removal

Removing the Front Trim


1. Slide a flatbladed spudger between the chassis and the plastic front
trim, near one of the four flex locks. See Figure 68.
2. Gently pry the front trim up and slightly forward to disengage the flex
lock. Do this until all four flex locks are disengaged.
3. Pull the front trim forward and off the instrument.

618

Maintenance

Removal and Installation Procedures

Menu Buttons and Elastomer


1. Lay the front trim on a flat surface.
2. Gently remove the menu button elastomer. Avoid touching the electrical
contacts.
3. Remove the menu button(s).
4. Install menu buttons by placing a menu button in each menu button
location.
5. Place the menu button elastomer over the menu buttons, ensuring that
all standoffs protrude through the elastomer. Avoid touching the electri
cal contacts.

Power Button Replacement


1. With the front trim removed, grasp the power button and pull straight out
from the chassis.
2. Install the power button by pushing the button onto the power button
shaft until it locks into place.

Installing the Front Trim


1. If the menu buttons were removed, insert each button to its hole in the
trim ring and install the menu button elastomer.
2. Align the front trim to the front of the instrument, without engaging any
of the four flex locks.
3. Position the power button in line with the frontpanel power button
opening.
4. Slide the front trim onto the instrument, ensuring that all four flex locks
engage.
5. If installing a new front trim, apply the appropriate front trim label.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

619

Removal and Installation Procedures

Trim Ring: To remove, grasp its back edge


and press up on its two tab locks. Flex the
trim ring upward; then pull it forward. Repeat
for the bottom edge of trim ring.
Tab Lock

Trim Ring
Menu Button
Menu Button Elastomer

Figure 68:Trim Ring and Menu Buttons Removal

A62 Front Panel


Module Removal

The following procedure describes how to remove the A62 Front Panel
module.

Additional procedures required This procedure requires that the


following procedures be performed first:
H

Rear Cover Removal

Cabinet Removal

FrontPanel Trim Ring

1. Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the work surface and its
front is facing you.
2. Insert the spudger into the slot at the frontright of the chassis. Push
inwards to release the snap lock at the right side. (See Figure 69.)
3. Pull the Front Panel module slightly away from the front of the chassis
until you can reach the interconnect cables at the rear of the module.
4. Unplug the following cables from their jacks on the Front Panel module:

620

Maintenance

Removal and Installation Procedures

The Display Controltofrontpanel cable at J84

The menu flex circuittofront panel at J40

The CPUtofrontpanel cable at J30

5. Lift the Front Panel module out from the chassis.

Front Panel
Assembly

Press Latch
to Release

Figure 69:A62 Front Panel Module Removal

FrontPanel Module Disassembly/Assembly


The following procedures describe the disassembly of the Front Panel
module into its subparts once it is removed from the instrument.

Additional procedures required These procedures require that the


following procedures be performed first:
H

FrontPanel Knobs and Shafts Removal

A4 Front Panel board Removal Perform the following steps to re


move the Front Panel board.

1. Remove the frontpanel knobs and shafts from the module.


2. Holding the Front Panel module, release the three snap locks at the
edge of the circuit board, then tilt the board away from the assembly
until it unplugs from J35. See Figure 610.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

621

Removal and Installation Procedures

3. Slide the circuit board out from the retainers found at the edge opposite
the snap locks and lift it away from the rest of the assembly.
4. At this point, the control potentiometers may be lifted out for cleaning
(they are not field replaceable). Lift the two potentiometers out from the
back of the frontpanel assembly.

FrontPanel Buttons and Elastomer Perform the following steps only


if replacing a damaged button or the frontpanel button elastomer.
5. Remove the frontpanel button elastomer from the back of the frontpan
el assembly. Do not touch the contacts with your fingers. See
Figure 610.
6. Replace damaged buttons or elastomer.
Front Panel Board
FrontPanel
Button Elastomer

Menu Button

Flex the latches (3) downward


to release board. Then, rotate
the board and pull it down.

Figure 610:Disassembly of FrontPanel Assembly

Ground Spring Removal Perform the next step only if replacing a

damaged ground spring.

7. Using Figure611 as a guide, grasp (compress) the base of the ground


spring (to release the spring) with tweezers (Item5) and pull the ground
spring away from the assembly.

622

Maintenance

Removal and Installation Procedures

Reassembly of the Front Panel Module Perform the next steps to

reassemble the Front Panel module.

8. If the frontpanel assembly was disassembled for cleaning in step 4,


apply a light, thin coating of bearing grease (Dow Corning #1292) to the
two switch patterns (circular patterns for the vertical and horizontal
scale rotary switches) on the circuit board.
9. Perform in reverse order each step taken during the disassembly of the
Front Panel module.

Rear of Front Panel

Ground Spring

Figure 611:FrontPanel Ground Spring

Menu Flex Circuit


Replacement

Perform this procedure only if replacing a failed or damaged menu


flex circuit with a fresh unit from the factory. (Removal of the circuit
will destroy it.)

Additional procedures required This procedure requires that the


following procedures be performed first:
H

Rear Cover Removal

Cabinet Removal

Front Trim Removal

A62 Front Panel Module Removal

1. Pull the flex circuit away from the front of the main chassis. (It is held on
by its sticky backing.) See Figure 612.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

623

Removal and Installation Procedures

2. Wipe the front of the chassis using isopropyl alcohol and a clean, lint
free cloth. Let dry. (Some adhesive from the flex circuit you removed will
be left on the front of the chassis. This is normal.)

Figure 612:Menu Flex Circuit Board Removal


3. Find the score line in the adhesive backing and peel the backing off of
the menu flex circuit.

NOTE
DO NOT touch the contacts on the menu flex circuit with your bare
fingers. You should wear clean cloth gloves that are free of lint
when installing the menu flex circuit on the front chassis.
4. Carefully align the three holes on the menu flex circuit to the locator
studs on the front of the main chassis. When the alignment is correct,
press the flex circuit against the chassis so it adheres to the chassis.
5. Clean the surface of the menu flex circuit just installed using isopropyl
alcohol and a clean, lintfree cloth.
6. Repeat all procedures performed in reverse order to reassemble the
instrument.

A1 Analog Board

The following procedure describes how to remove the A1 Analog board.

Additional procedures required This procedure requires that the

following procedures be performed first:

624

Maintenance

Removal and Installation Procedures

Rear Cover Removal

Cabinet Removal

Front Trim Removal

1. Set the oscilloscope so its top side is down on the work surface and its
front is facing you.
2. Disconnect the delay line from its holder and at connector J68 on the
Analog board.
3. Disconnect the cables at connectors J50 and J67 on the Analog board.
4. Disconnect the cable to the rear panel Zaxis connector.
5. Using Figure 613 as a guide, remove the four T15 TorxR screws secur
ing the attenuator assembly to the front of the chassis. Next remove the
four T15 TorxR screws securing the attenuator board to the chassis.
6. Lift the attenuator assembly away from the oscilloscope to complete its
removal.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

625

Removal and Installation Procedures

Mounting Screws (4)


A1 Analog board

Mounting Screws (4)

Figure 613:A1 Analog Board Removal

Display Driver Board


(A3)

Remove and replace the Display Driver board as follows:


1. Remove the plastic high voltage cover from the rear of the Display Driver
board (A3). Refer to Figure614.
2. Disconnect the delay line from its holder and at connector J69 on the
Display Driver board.
3. Disconnect the cables from J70, J71, J72, J73, J74, J75, and J80 on the
Display Driver board.
4. Disconnect J67 from the Analog Board (A1).
5. Remove the four T15 Torx screws used to attach the Display Driver
board to the chassis.

626

Maintenance

Removal and Installation Procedures

6. Remove the Display Driver board from the chassis, but leave the clear
plastic sheet in place.
7. Replace the Display Driver board by performing the reverse of the
procedure described in steps 1 through 6.

Display Driver
Board (A3)

Mounting Screw

High Voltage Cover

Mounting Screw

Figure 614:Location of Display Driver Board

CRT Implosion Shield

The procedures that follow describe how to remove and install the CRT
Implosion Shield. The method to accomplish this is different depending on
the serial number of your instrument. Choose the correct procedure for your
instrument by comparing your instrument serial number to those listed.

Current MethodThe following procedures describe the removal of the

CRT Implosion Shield for the instrument models described in the following
note.

NOTE
TAS 455 SN: B011876 and Above
TAS 465 SN: B011640 and Above

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

627

Removal and Installation Procedures

Additional procedures required This procedure requires that the


following procedures be performed first:
H

Rear Cover Removal

Cabinet Removal

Front Trim Removal

1. From the front of the Implosion Shield, slip the spudger into the slot
provided on the side of the CRT Front Bracket. See Figure 615.
2. Carefully pry the Implosion Shield up and out of the CRT Front Bracket
guides.
3. Reinstall the Implosion Shield by placing the left side of the shield into
the CRT Front Bracket guides. If installing a new Implosion Shield,
remove the clear protective covers.
4. Snap the right side of the Implosion shield into the CRT Front Bracket
snaps.
5. Install all previously removed components.

CRT Implosion
Shield

Implosion Shield
Guides

Slot In CRT Bracket

Spudger

Figure 615:CRT Implosion Shield Removal

628

Maintenance

Removal and Installation Procedures

Early MethodThe following procedures describe the removal of the CRT


Implosion Shield for the instrument models described in the following note.

NOTE
TAS 455 SN: B011875 and Below
TAS 465 SN: B011639 and Below

Additional procedures required This procedure requires that the


following procedures be performed first:
H

Rear Cover Removal

Cabinet Removal

Front Trim Removal

A3 Display Driver Board

Fan Assembly

CRT

1. From the front of the Implosion Shield, push the top of the shield until it
pops out of the back side of the CRT Front Bracket.
2. Reinstall the CRT Implosion shield by snapping the shield into the rear
of the CRT Front Bracket. If installing a new Implosion Shield, remove
the clear protective covers.
3. Install all previously removed components.

Fan and Fan Mount

The procedures that follow describe how to remove and install the Fan and
Fan Mount.

Additional procedures required This procedure requires that the


following procedures be performed first:
H

Rear Cover Removal

Cabinet Removal

Fan and Fan Mount Removal


1. Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down.
2. Unplug the fan power cable from the A63 Power Supply module.
3. Rotate the oscilloscope so the side that houses the fan mount is facing
upwards.
4. Depress the two flex locks to release them (see Figure 617).

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

629

Removal and Installation Procedures

5. While holding the flex locks released, slide the fan mount so its four
retainer lugs slide from their small retainer holes in the chassis into their
large release holes. See Figure 616.

Flex Locks

Retainer Lugs
(4)

Figure 616:Fan Mount Removal


6. Move the fan mount inward so its retainer lugs are out of the large
retainer holes and lift the fan mount and fan out of the chassis. See
Figure617.

Flex locks

Fan Mount

Fan

Figure 617:Fan and Fan Mount Removal

630

Maintenance

Removal and Installation Procedures

DO NOT remove the fan from the fan mount unless servicing a
broken fan or fan mount or removing the mount for cleaning.
7. Release the two flex locks securing the top of the fan to the fan mount,
then lift the fan out from the mount.

Fan and Fan Mount Installation


1. If the fan was removed from the fan mount, press the fan into the fan
mount until the four retainer clips snap into place, securing the fan.
2. Install the fan assembly so that the retainer lugs on the mount are posi
tioned in the large holes of the chassis; then, slide the fan assembly until
the lugs slip into the small holes and the two flex locks snap into place.
3. Reconnect the fan power cable.
4. Reinstall all removed components.

CRT

The procedures that follow describe how to remove and install the CRT.
Refer to Figure 619 for this procedure.

Additional procedures required This procedure requires that the


following procedures be performed first:
H

Rear Cover Removal

Cabinet Removal

Front Trim Removal

A3 Display Driver Board

CRT Removal
1. Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the work surface, with its
front facing you.

WARNING
Breaking a CRT causes it to implode, scattering glass fragments
with high velocity and possibly injuring you. Wear protective
clothing and safety glasses (preferably a fullface shield). Avoiding
striking the CRT with or against any object.
Store the CRT with its display face down in a protected location,
placing it on a soft, nonabrasive surface to prevent scratching the
face plate.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

631

Removal and Installation Procedures

2. Unplug the the 2wide red/black cable from the A2 Display Control
board.

WARNING
Highvoltage is present on the anode lead. Do not touch the end of
the anode lead until it has been fully discharged to ground.
3. Disconnect the red CRT anode lead from the A63 Power Supply module
and immediately discharge to chassis ground.
4. Using a 5@16 inch nut driver, remove the nut securing the ground wire at
the rear of the CRT.
5. From the bottom of the chassis, unsnap the Rear CRT Bracket from the
chassis. See Figure 618.

Rear CRT Bracket

Spring Ground Wire

Release Rear CRT


Bracket Latch From
Chassis

Figure 618:CRT Rear Bracket and Ground Wire


6. Lift the rear of the CRT until it is above the chassis. Then pull the CRT
away from the CRT Front Bracket.
Stop here if you are removing the CRT assembly to gain access to
other portions of the instrument. If you are installing a new CRT or
hardware attached to the CRT, continue with this procedure.
7. Slide the Rear CRT Bracket from the CRT. The Spring Ground Wire will
slide out also.
8. Remove the CRT Socket with its cover from the rear pin connector of the
CRT.
9. Disconnect the vertical and horizontal control wires from the side of the
CRT. Note the proper location of both sets of wires for reinstallation.

632

Maintenance

Removal and Installation Procedures

10. Slide the CRT shield and its front support off the CRT.
11. Store the CRT in a safe location.

CRT Installation
1. Slide the CRT shield and its front support onto the CRT as far forward as
possible.
2. Align the holes in the shield so that the vertical and horizontal control
pins on the side of the CRT are accessible.
3. Align the slot in the CRT Socket to the key on the CRT pin connector
and slide the Socket onto the pins.
4. Slip the CRT socket wires through the Rear CRT Bracket and slide the
bracket onto the rear of the CRT.
5. Ensure that the Rear CRT Bracket is properly aligned with the slots
provided in the CRT Shield.
6. Slide the Spring Ground Clip into the slot provided in the Rear CRT
Bracket.
7. Connect the vertical and horizontal control wires to the side CRT pins.
8. Guide the front of the CRT into the CRT Front Bracket. Ensure that the
four CRT Cushions are in their proper place in each corner of the Brack
et.
9. Lower the rear of the CRT into the chassis and press down on the CRT
Rear Bracket until it snaps into the chassis.
10. Route the vertical and horizontal control cables to the bottom of the
chassis.
11. Connect the red anode lead to its connector from the A63 Power Supply
module.
12. Plug the the 2wide red/black cable to the A2 Display Control board.
13. Install all previously removed components.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

633

Removal and Installation Procedures

Rear CRT Bracket


CRT
Socket
Cover

CRT Shield

CRT
Socket
CRT

CRT Mount
Cushion (4)

Static Ground
Contact

Front CRT
Bracket

CRT Anode Lead


CRT Shield
Support

Implosion
Shield

Light Guide

Display
Control
Board

Figure 619:CRT Removal

CRT Light Guide

The procedures that follow describe how to remove and install the CRT Light
Guide. Refer to Figure 619 for this procedure.

Additional procedures required This procedure requires that the

following procedures be performed first:


H
H

Cabinet Removal

634

Rear Cover Removal

Front Trim Removal

Maintenance

Removal and Installation Procedures

A3 Display Driver Board

CRT

1. Lift the light guide off the light bulbs on the A2 Display Control board.
2. Reinstall the light guide by sliding the guide over the light bulbs on the
A2 Display Control board.

NOTE
To properly guide the light to the CRT, the beveled edge of the light
guide must be facing up, toward the CRT.
3. Install all previously removed components.

CRT Front Bracket

The procedures that follow describe how to remove and install the CRT
Front Bracket. Refer to Figure 619 for this procedure.

Additional procedures required This procedure requires that the

following procedures be performed first:


H

Rear Cover Removal

Cabinet Removal

Front Trim Removal

A3 Display Driver Board

Fan Assembly

CRT

1. Remove the four screws securing the CRT front bracket to the chassis.
2. Lift the CRT front bracket out from inside the chassis. See Figure 620.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

635

Removal and Installation Procedures

Mounting
Screw

Figure 620:Removing the CRT front bracket


3. Reinstall the CRT front bracket by sliding the bracket into the chassis
and secure it with the four mounting screws.
4. Install all previously removed components.

A2 Display Control
Board

The procedures that follow describe how to remove and install the CRT
Front Bracket.

Additional procedures required This procedure requires that the


following procedures be performed first:
H

Rear Cover Removal

Cabinet Removal

Front Trim Removal

A3 Display Driver Board

Fan Assembly

CRT

1. Unplug the cables from connectors J80, J82, and J84 on the A2 Display
Control board.

636

Maintenance

Removal and Installation Procedures

2. Lift the A2 Display Control board up toward the top of the chassis,
sliding the board out of the board retainers. See Figure 621.

Figure 621:Removing the Display Control Board


3. Reinstall the A2 Display Control board by sliding the board into the
board retainers.
4. Reinstall all cables at connectors J80, J82, and J84.
5. Install all previously removed components.

A63 Power Supply


Module

The procedures that follow describe how to remove and install the Power
Supply module.

Additional procedures required This procedure requires that the

following procedures be performed first:


H

Rear Cover Removal

Cabinet Removal

Power Supply Removal


1. Set the oscilloscope so its top is down on the work surface.
2. Disconnect the power button shaft from the power switch on the Power
Supply module. See Figure 622.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

637

Removal and Installation Procedures

Power Button Shaft


Power Switch
Located on Power
Supply Module

Figure 622:Power Button Shaft Disconnect


3. Unplug the cables going to the A3 Display Driver board at J70 and J71.
4. Set the oscilloscope so its bottom down on the work surface.
5. Unplug the cable going to the A5 CPU board at J55.
6. Unplug the twowide cable from the fan.
7. Unplug the red CRT anode lead from the power supply connector.
8. Remove the two screws securing the Power Supply module to the
chassis.
9. Lift the Power Supply module out of the chassis to complete its removal.
10. Slide the Power Supply module into the chassis, noting that the tab at
the bottom of the Power Supply module slides into the slot at the bottom
of the chassis. See Figure 623.

Power Supply Installation


1. Reconnect all cables and wires disconnected during the removal proce
dure.
2. Reinstall all components removed.

638

Maintenance

Removal and Installation Procedures

Mounting Screw (2)

Mounting Tab

Figure 623:Power Supply Removal

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

639

Removal and Installation Procedures

640

Maintenance

Troubleshooting
This subsection contains information and procedures designed to help you
isolate problems to a faulty module in the oscilloscope. If a module needs to
be removed for repair or replacement, follow the Removal and Installation
Procedures located in this section.

Troubleshooting
Procedure

If the oscilloscope does not perform correctly, note each symptom or failure.
Next, refer to the Symptom Matrix Table (Table 65). Locate the symptoms
that most closely resemble the symptoms you noted. If there are multiple
symptoms, use a process of elimination to reduce the number of possible
faulty modules. Identify possible faulty modules, and then perform the
troubleshooting procedure/s indicated.
The cabinet must be removed to gain access to the modules for measuring
signals and voltages. Refer to the Removal and Installation Procedures
beginning on page 69 for instructions to remove the cabinet.

Equipment

Table 64 lists the equipment required to perform the troubleshooting proce


dures.
Table64:Equipment Required for Troubleshooting
Equipment

Example

Test Oscilloscope

Tektronix TAS 465

Digital Multimeter (DMM)

Tektronix DM250

High Voltage Probe

Fluke Model 80K-40

CAUTION

High voltages are present when the cabinet is removed. Do not remove the
high voltage shield from the A3 Display Driver board unless it is necessary to
measure the high voltage. Do not perform this procedure without the pres
ence of another person who is cable of providing aid.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

641

Troubleshooting

Symptom Matrix

The Symptom Matrix (Table 65) is an aid in determining which modules to


troubleshoot. There is no separate troubleshooting procedure for the power
supply, since each module troubleshooting procedure includes checks of
the power supply. The CRT is checked in the display control and display
driver troubleshooting procedures.
The F indicates the troubleshooting procedure most likely to locate the
failed module. The f indicates additional troubleshooting procedures that
may help located the failed module.
Table65:Symptom Matrix
Processor Analog

Display
Driver

Front
Panel

Display
Control

No display at all

Traces or readout, but not both

Abnormal readout

Abnormal traces

Abnormal traces and readout

Poweron diagnostics indicates a failure

Selfcalibration does not pass

One control works but not both

Neither control works

No control of Volts/Div or vertical position of a


single channel

No control of Volts/Div or vertical position of


any channels

Symptom
Display Problems

F
f

Volts/Div and Sec/Div controls

Intensity Control Problems


No control of readout and trace intensity
Control of readout or trace intensity but
not both
Focus Problems
No control of focus

Unable to focus properly

No control of trace rotation

No control of scale illumination

642

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Table65:Symptom Matrix (Cont.)


Symptom

Processor Analog

Display
Driver

Front
Panel

Display
Control

Trigger level, vertical position, and horizontal


position
The trace position controls nor the Trig
ger Level control works

Some of these controls work but not all

Probe Scale (X10) Problems


Volts/Div readout does not change with a
X10 probe on any channel

Front Panel Control Problems


Front panel controls do not work but
readout display works

Front panel controls do not work and the


readout display is abnormal

CRT Bezel buttons do not work but other


buttons and knobs work

Front panel LED Problems


No LED's momentarily light at poweron
but readout is okay

No LED's momentarily light at poweron


and abnormal readout

Some LED's momentarily light at power


on, but not all do
No trigger on line source

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

F
f

643

Troubleshooting

This procedure assumes that


there is front panel control
and readout on the CRT.

Measure the power supply voltages


at J55 on the A5 CPU board.
Pin 1
-5.2V
Pin 2
+5.2V
Pin 3
Ground
Pin 4
-8.6V
Pin 5
+8.6V

Are
the voltages
approximately the
same as the nominal
value?

No

Turn the power off. Remove the


cable to J55 on the A5 CPU
board and check pins 1, 2, 4, and
5 for shorts to ground (pin 3).

Yes
Measure the signal on U217 pin
26 on the A5 CPU board with the
test oscilloscope.

Is the
signal amplitude
approximately 5V
and the period
60 nS?

Are
any of the pins
shorted?

No

Yes

No

Disconnect the cable at


J30 on the A4 Front
Panel board and check
the pins again for shorts.

Yes

Turn the power off and remove


the power cord. Remove the
fuse from the fuse holder.
Measure the fuse resistance
with a DMM.

Measure the signal on pins 24


and 25 of J50 on the A5 CPU
board with the oscilloscope while
turning the VOLTS/DIV control
back and forth.

Are
any of the pins
shorted?

Is
the line fuse
resistance less
than 10 W?

Replace the
line fuse.

Yes
No

Yes

Set the test oscilloscope trigger


to Norm and trigger level to 2.5V.

No

Does
the line fuse
blow when the
POWER button is
pressed?
Yes

Does
the signal trigger
the oscilloscope
when the knob is
turned?
Yes
A5 CPU board.

Replace the A63 Power


Supply module.
No

Replace the A5
CPU board.

Perform the A4 Front Panel


board troubleshooting
procedure.

Figure 624:A5 CPU Board Troubleshooting Procedure

644

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

This procedure assumes that


there is front panel control.

Measure the power supply


voltages on J67 on the A1
Analog board.
Pin 12
+15V
Pin 10
+8.6V
Pin 9
-8.6V
Pin 6
+5.2V
Pin 1
-5.2V

Are
the voltages
approximately the
same as the nominal
value?

No

Turn the power off. Remove


the cable at J67 on the A1
Analog board and check
pins 12, 10, 9, 6, and 1 for
shorts to ground.

Yes

No

No

Perform the A3 Display Driver


Board Troubleshooting
Procedure.

Yes
Replace the A1 Analog board.

Press the CH1 button


and rotate the VOLTS/DIV
knob several times in
each direction. Repeat
for remaining channel(s).
Listen for clicks between
some of the voltage
ranges.

Were
clicks heard for
each channel?

Are any
of the pins
shorted?

Have you
performed both
the A5 CPU Board and the
A62 Front Panel module
Troubleshooting
Procedures?

No

Perform both to isolate


the problem.

Yes
Go to
Part
Two

Yes
Replace the A1 Analog board.

Figure 625:A1 Analog Board Troubleshooting Procedure

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

645

Troubleshooting

Part Two

Note: In XY mode, a single


spot should appear near
the center of the CRT.
Reduce the intensity until
the spot is dim so that the
CRT phosphor will not be
damaged.

Put the oscilloscope in XY


mode. Select CH2 and turn
the readout intensity to
minimum. Measure the
voltage across the delay
line (J68) with a DMM.

Does
the voltage vary
between 100 mV to -100 mV
as the vertical position
knob is rotated?

No

Yes
Select CH1 and
measure the voltage
across pins 16 and 17
of J67 with a DMM or
oscilloscope.
Yes
Does
the voltage change
as the vertical position
knob is rotated?

No

Yes
Rotate the Intensity knob
and measure the voltage at
pin 19 of J67 with a DMM
or oscilloscope.
Yes
Does
the voltage vary as
the position knob
is moved?
Yes
Done.

No

Perform the A5 CPU


Board Troubleshooting
Procedure.

Is the
A5 CPU board
okay?

No

Replace the A5
CPU board.

Yes
Replace the A1 Analog board.

Figure 625:A1 Analog Board Troubleshooting Procedure (Cont.)

646

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

This procedure assumes that


there is front panel control.

Measure the power supply voltages


on the A3 Display Driver board.
W66:
Pin 12
Pin 10
Pin 9
Pin 6
Pin 1

+15V
+8.6V
-8.6V
+5.2V
-5.2V

J70:
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 13

+60V
+130V
200V(AC)

Are
the voltages
approximately the
same as the
nominal
value?

No

Turn the power off.


Disconnect the cables at
W66 and J70 on the A1
Analog board. Check
the pins listed above for
shorts to ground.

Yes

Are
any of the pins
shorted?

No

Yes
Replace the A3 Display
Driver board.

Measure voltage on pin 1 of J71


with a highvoltage probe and a
DMM.

Turn the power off and remove


the power cord. Remove the
fuse from the fuse holder.
Measure the fuse resistance
with a DMM.

Is
the line fuse
resistance less
than 10 W?

Yes

No

Was
the voltage
approximately
-2 kV?

No

Replace the
line fuse.
Replace the A63 Power
Supply module.
Does
the line fuse
blow when the
POWER button is
pressed?

Yes
Go to
Part
Two

Yes
Replace the A63 Power
Supply module.

Figure 626:A3 Display Driver Board Troubleshooting Procedure

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

647

Troubleshooting

Part
Two

Put the oscilloscope in XY mode.


Turn the readout intensity all the
way down. Select CH2 and vary
the vertical position knob while
measuring the voltage across
J75 pins 3 and 1 (W76 and W75
on TAS 485) with a DMM or
oscilloscope.

Does
the voltage vary as
the position knob is
moved?

No

Note: In XY mode, a single


spot should appear near
the center of the CRT.
Reduce the intensity until
the spot is dim so that the
CRT phosphor will not be
damaged.

Have
you perform the
A1 Analog Board
Troubleshooting
Procedure?

Yes

No

Perform the A1 Analog


Board Troubleshooting
Procedure.

Yes

Press the CH1 button and


rotate the vertical position knob
while measuring the voltage
across the pins 16 and 17 of J67
with a DMM or oscilloscope.

Does
the voltage vary as
the position knob
is moved?

Replace the A3 Display


Driver board.

No

Yes
Are
traces and
readout visible on
the CRT?

No

Yes
Can
the trace and
readout be focused
with the focus
thumbwheel?

Yes
Done.

No

Measure the voltage at the


base (middle pin) of Q361
while adjusting the focus
knob.

Does
the voltage vary as
the position knob
is moved?

No

Perform the A2 Display


Control Board
Troubleshooting Procedure.

Yes
Replace the CRT.

Figure 626:A3 Display Driver Board Troubleshooting Procedure (Cont.)

648

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

This procedure checks the A62 Front


Panel module. Since the front panel
is difficult to probe while installed,
measurements are taken on J30 of
the processor module.

Measure the power supply voltages


on J30 of the A5 CPU board.
Pin 10
-5.2V
Pin 1
+5.2V

Are
the voltages
approximately the same
as the nominal
value?

Turn the power off.


Disconnect the cable from
the A62 Front Panel module
to the A5 CPU board.
Check pins 1 and 10 for
shorts to ground.

No

Yes

No

Perform the A5 CPU


Board Troubleshooting
Procedure.

Yes
Disconnect the front panel
cable to J84 on the display
control module and check
the J30 pins 1 and 10 again
for shorts to ground.

With an oscilloscope, measure the


signals on pins 5 and 6 of J30.
Turn knobs and press buttons
while watching the signals for small
changes in shape.

Does
the signal change
shape with front panel
changes?

Are
any of the pins
shorted?

No

Replace the A62 Front


Panel module.

Are
any of the
pins shorted?

No

Replace the A3 Display


Driver board.

Yes
Replace the A62 Front
Panel module.

Yes
Connect a X10 probe to the CH 1
input connector while watching the
Volts/Div readout on the CRT.

Did
the Volts/Div
readout
change?

No

Measure the voltage on


pin13 of J30 while con
necting and disconnecting
the probe to channel 1.

Yes

Did
the voltage change
from about 4.8V to
about 5.2V?

No

Replace the A1 Analog


board.

Yes
Replace the A62 Front
Panel module

Done.

Figure 627:A62 Front Panel module Troubleshooting Procedure

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

649

Troubleshooting

This procedure checks the


A2 Display Control board.

Turn the Scale Illumination


control while watching the CRT.

Does
the scale illumination
change?

No

Disconnect the cable to


J80 on the A2 Display
Control board.

Yes

No

No

Replace the A63 Power


Supply module.

No

Perform the A62 Front Panel


Module Troubleshooting
Procedure.

Yes

Measure the voltage on the


center pin of each of the
control potentiometers.
Check for the voltages below
while rotating the controls.
Readout
0 to +5.2V
Focus
0 to -5.2V
Intensity
0 to +5.2V

Do
the voltages
vary approximately
within their
range?

Is
the voltage on pin
12, W66 on the A3
Display Driver board
approximately
+15V?

Replace the A2 Display


Control board.

Disconnect the cable to


J84. Perform the front
panel troubleshooting
procedure to check the
supply voltages.

Are
the front panel
voltages approximately
their nominal
value?

Yes
Yes

Adjust the Trace Rotation


while watching the CRT display.

Does
the CRT display rotate
with adjustment?

Yes
Done.

No

Replace the A2 Display


Control board.

Disconnect the cable to


J82 on the A2 Display
Control board. Measure
the voltage on pin 1
while varying the Trace
Rotation.

Does
the voltage on pin 1
vary from approximately
+5.2V to -5.2V?

No

Replace the A2 Display


Control board.

Yes
Replace the CRT.

Figure 628:A2 Display Control Board Troubleshooting Procedure

650

Maintenance

Repackaging Information
If you ship the TAS 455 or TAS 465 Oscilloscope, pack it in the original
shipping carton and packing material. If the original packing material is not
available, package the instrument as follows:
1. Obtain a corrugated cardboard shipping carton with inside dimensions
at least 15cm (6in) taller, wider, and deeper than the TAS 455 or
TAS 465 Oscilloscope. The shipping carton must be constructed of
cardboard with 170 kg (375 pound) test strength.
2. If you are shipping the TAS 455 or TAS 465 Oscilloscope to a Tektronix
field office for repair, attach a tag to the oscilloscope showing the instru
ment owner and address, the name of the person to contact about the
instrument, the instrument type, and the serial number.
3. Wrap the oscilloscope with polyethylene sheeting or equivalent material
to protect the finish.
4. Cushion the oscilloscope in the shipping carton by tightly packing
dunnage or urethane foam on all sides between the carton and the
oscilloscope. Allow 7.5cm (3in) on all sides, top, and bottom.
5. Seal the shipping carton with shipping tape or an industrial stapler.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

651

Repackaging Information

652

Maintenance

Options
This section contains a list of options available for the TAS 455 and TAS 465
Analog Oscilloscopes.

Options A1-A5: International Power Cords


Besides the standard North American, 110 V, 60 Hz power cord, Tektronix
ships any of five alternate power cord configurations. See Table 71.
Table71:International Power Cords
Option

Power Cord

A1

Universal European 220 V, 50 Hz

A2

UK 240 V, 50 Hz

A3

Australian 240 V, 50 Hz

A4

North American 240 V, 60 Hz

A5

Switzerland 220 V, 50 Hz

WarrantyPlus Service Options


The following options add to the services available with the standard warran
ty. (The standard warranty appears following the title page in this manual.)
H

Option M2: Tektronix provides five years of warranty/remedial service.

Option M3: Tektronix provides five years of warranty/remedial service


and four oscilloscope calibrations.

Option M8: Tektronix provides four calibrations and four performance


verifications, one of each in the second through the fifth years of service.

Option 3R: Rackmount


With this option, Tektronix ships the oscilloscope with a rackmount kit,
providing all the necessary hardware to adapt the oscilloscope for installa
tion into a standard 19 inch instrument rack. Customers with instruments
can order a rackmount kit (Tektronix part number 016-1166-00) for conver
sion with instructions.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

71

Options

Option 02: Front Cover and Pouch


With this option, Tektronix ships a protective front cover to prevent damage
to the front panel of the oscilloscope while not in use. An attachable pouch
(attaches to the instrument top) provides storage for the manuals and
probes supplied with your oscilloscope plus other additional accessories
you may want to keep with your oscilloscope.

Option 23: Additional Probes


With this option, Tektronix ships two P6129B 1X 10X switchable passive
probes in addition to the two standardaccessory P6109B probes normally
shipped with the instrument.

Option 9C: Certificate of Calibration and Test Data Report


Tektronix ships a Certificate of Calibration that states this instrument meets
or exceeds all warranted specifications and has been calibrated using
standards and instruments whose accuracies are traceable to the National
Institute of Standards and Technology, an accepted value of a natural physi
cal constant or a ratio calibration technique. The calibration is in compliance
with U.S. MIL-STD-45662A. This option also includes a test data report for
the instrument.

72

Options

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Parts Ordering
Information

Replacement parts are available from or through your local Tektronix, Inc.
Field Office or representative.
When ordering parts, include the following information in your order: part
number, instrument type or number, serial number, and modification number
if applicable.
If a part you have ordered has been replaced with a new or improved part,
your local Tektronix, Inc. Field Office or representative will contact you con
cerning any change in part number.
Change information, if any, is located at the rear of this manual.

List of Assemblies

A list of assemblies can be found at the beginning of the electrical parts list.
The assemblies are listed in numerical order. When the complete compo
nent number of a part is known, this list will identify the assembly in which
the part is located.

Cross IndexMfr.
Code Number to
Manufacturer

The Mfg. Code Number to Manufacturer Cross Index for the electrical parts
list is located immediately after this page. The cross index provides codes,
names, and addresses of manufacturers of components listed in the electri
cal parts list.

Abbreviations

Abbreviations conform to American National Standard Y1.1.

Component Number
(column 1 of the parts list)

Example a.

component number

A23R1234

A23

R1234
Circuit number

Assembly number

Read: Resistor 1234 of Assembly 23


Example b.
A23A2R1234
Assembly number

component number
A23

A2

R1234

Subassembly number

Circuit number

Read: Resistor 1234 of Subassembly 2 of Assembly 23

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

81

Replaceable Electrical Parts

The circuit component number appears on the diagrams and circuit board
illustrations. Each diagram and circuit board illustration is clearly marked
with the assembly number. Assembly numbers are also marked on the
mechanical exploded views located in the mechanical parts list. The compo
nent number is obtained by adding the assembly number prefix to the circuit
number.
The electrical parts list is divided and arranged by assemblies in numerical
sequence (e.g., assembly A1 with its subassemblies and parts, precedes
assembly A2 with its subassemblies and parts).
Chassismounted parts have no assembly number prefix and are located at
the end of the electrical parts list.

Tektronix Part No.


(column 2 of the parts list)

Serial No.
(columns 3 & 4 of the parts list)

Name & Description


(column five of the parts list)

Mfr. Code
(column 6 of the parts list)

Mfr. Part No.

Indicates part number to be used when ordering replacement part from


Tektronix.

Column three (3) indicates the serial number at which the part was first
used. Column four (4) indicates the serial number at which the part was
removed. No serial number entered indicates part is good for all serial
numbers.

In the parts list, an item name is separated from the description by a colon
(:). Because of space limitations, an item name may sometimes appear as
incomplete. For further item name identification, the U.S. Federal Catalog
handbook H61 can be utilized where possible.

Indicates the code number of the actual manufacturer of the part. (Code to
name and address cross reference can be found immediately after this
page.)

Indicates the part number used by the manufacturer.

(column 7 of the parts list)

82

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Replaceable Electrical Parts

CROSS INDEX - MFR. CODE NUMBER TO MANUFACTURER


Mfr.
Code

Manufacturer

Address

City, State, Zip Code

S4246

JAPAN SERVO CO LTD

7 KANDA
MITOSHIRO-CHO CHIYODA-KU

TOKYO JAPAN

TK0213

TOPTRON CORP

TK0515

ERICSSON COMPONENTS INC

403 INTERNATIONAL PKWY


PO BOX 853904

RICHARDSON, TX 750853904

TK0860

LABEL GRAPHICS INC

ATTN: DALE GREMAUX


6700 SW BRADBURY CT

PORTLAND, OR 97224

TK1146

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORP

1230 OAKMEAD PARKWAY

SUNNYVALE CA 94086

TK1442

TAIYO-YUDEN (USA) INC

ARLINGTON CENTER
714 W ALGONQUIN RD

ARLINGTON HEIGHTS IL 60005

TK1492

COFER COMPONENT PROCESSING

3270 KELLER ST
UNIT 11

SANTA CLARA CA 95050

TK1727

PHILIPS NEDERLAND BV
AFD ELONCO

POSTBUS 90050

5600 PB EINDHOVEN THE


NETHERLANDS

TK1908

PLASTIC MOLDED PRODUCT INC

4336 S ADAMS

TACOMA, WA 98409

TK1913

WIMA
THE INTER-TECHNICAL GROUP IND

ONE BRIDGE ST
PO BOX 23

IRVINGTON NY 10533

TK1943

NEILSEN MANUFACTURING INC

3501 PORTLAND RD NE

SALEM, OR 97303

TK2058

TDK CORPORATION OF AMERICA

1600 FEEHANVILLE DRIVE

MOUNT PROSPECT, IL 60056

TK2073

TOCOS AMERICA INC

565 W GULF ROAD

ARLINGTON HEIGHTS IL 60005

TK2469

UNITREK CORPORATION

3000 LEWIS & CLARK WAY


SUITE #2

VANCOUVER WA 98601

TK2597

MERIX CORP

1521 POPLAR LANE

FOREST GROVE, OR 97116

TK2606

VISPRO

PO BOX 6239

BEAVERTON, OR 970070239

TK6056

ASTEK USA

2880 SAN TOMES EXPRESSWAY


SUITE 200

SANTA CLARA CA 95051

0ADN8

DELTA PRODUCTS

3225 LAURELVIEW CT

FREMONT, CA 94538

0B0A9

DALLAS SEMICONDUCTOR CORP

4350 BELTWOOD PKWY SOUTH

DALLAS TX 75244

0H1N5

MARCON AMERICA CORP

998 FIRST EDGE DRIVE

VERNON HILLS IL 60061

0JR03

ZMAN MAGNETICS INC

7633 S 180TH

KENT WA 98032

0JR04

TOSHIBA AMERICA INC


ELECTRONICS COMPONENTS DIV
BUSINESS SECTOR

2692 DOW AVE

TUSTIN CA 92680

0JR05

TRIQUEST PRECISION PLASTICS

3000 LEWIS & CLARK HWY


PO BOX 66008

VANCOUVER, WA 98666-6008

0J7N9

MCX INC

30608 SAN ANTONIO ST

HAYWARD CA 94544

0J9R2

HARISON ELECTRIC CO LTD

2-1 ASAHIMACHI 5-CHOME


IMARARI

EMINE, JAPAN 527R

0KB01

STAUFFER SUPPLY CO

810 SE SHERMAN

PORTLAND, OR 972144657

00779

AMP INC

2800 FULLING MILL


PO BOX 3608

HARRISBURG PA 17105

01295

TEXAS INSTRUMENTS INC


SEMICONDUCTOR GROUP

13500 N CENTRAL EXPY


PO BOX 655012

DALLAS TX 75265

01884

DEARBORN ELECTRONICS INC

1221 NORTH HIGHWAY 17/92

LONGWOOD, FL 32750

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

TOKYO JAPAN

83

Replaceable Electrical Parts

CROSS INDEX - MFR. CODE NUMBER TO MANUFACTURER


Mfr.
Code

Manufacturer

Address

City, State, Zip Code

02114

PHILIPS COMPONENTS

FERROXCUBE DIV
5083 KINGS HWY

SAUGERTIES, NY 12477

04222

AVX CERAMICS
DIV OF AVX CORP

19TH AVE SOUTH


P O BOX 867

MYRTLE BEACH SC 29577

04713

MOTOROLA INC
SEMICONDUCTOR PRODUCTS SECTOR

5005 E MCDOWELL RD

PHOENIX AZ 85008-4229

05828

GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP


GOVERNMENT SYSTEMS DIV

600 W JOHN ST

HICKSVILLE NY 11802

06090

ERICSSON RAYNET CORP

155 CONSTITUTION DR

MENLO PARK, CA 94025-1106

06383

PANDUIT CORP

17303 RIDGELAND AVE

TINLEY PARK, IL 60477-3048

09969

DALE ELECTRONICS INC

EAST HIGHWAY 50
P O BOX 180

YANKTON SD 57078

1CH66

PHILIPS SEMICONDUCTORS

811 E ARQUES AVENUE


PO BOX 3409

SUNNYVALE CA 94088-3409

1W344

UNITED CHEMI-CON INC

9801 W HIGGINS
SUITE 430

ROSEMONT IL 60018-4704

12697

CLAROSTAT MFG CO INC

LOWER WASHINGTON ST

DOVER NH 03820

12954

MICROSEMI CORP - SCOTTSDALE

8700 E THOMAS ROAD


PO BOX 1390

SCOTTSDALE, AZ 85252-5252

12969

MICROSEMI CORP

WATERTOWN DIVISION
530 PLEASANT STREET

WATERTWON, MA 02172

14552

MICROSEMI CORP

2830 S FAIRVIEW ST

SANTA ANA CA 92704-5948

17856

SILICONIX INC

2201 LAURELWOOD RD

SANTA CLARA CA 95054-1516

18796

MURATA ERIE NORTH AMERICAN INC


STATE COLLEGE OPERATIONS

1900 W COLLEGE AVE

STATE COLLEGE PA 16801-2723

19701

PHILIPS COMPONENTS DISCRETE


PRODUCTS
DIV RESISTIVE PRODUCTS FACILITY
AIRPORT ROAD

PO BOX 760

MINERAL WELLS TX 76067-0760

20462

PREM MAGNETICS INC

3521 N CHAPEL HILL ROAD

MCHENRY, IL 60050

20932

KYOCERA INTERNATIONAL INC

11620 SORRENTO VALLEY RD


PO BOX 81543 PLANT NO 1

SAN DIEGO CA 92121

22526

DU PONT E I DE NEMOURS AND CO INC


DU PONT ELECTRONICS DEPT

515 FISHING CREEK RD

NEW CUMBERLAND PA 17070-3007

22670

GM NAMEPLATE INCORPORATED

2040 15TH AVE WEST

SEATTLE, WA 981192783

24165

SPRAGUE ELECTRIC CO

267 LOWELL ROAD

HUDSON NH 03051

24546

DALE ELECTRONICS INC

550 HIGH ST

BRADFORD, PA 16701

24931

SPECIALTY CONNECTOR CO INC

2100 EARLYWOOD DR
PO BOX 547

FRANKLIN IN 46131

26769

PHILIPS COMPONENTS

CHIP TANTALUM FACILITY


5900 AUSTRALIAN AVE

WEST PALM BEACH, FL 33407-2330

27014

NATIONAL SEMICONDUCTOR CORP

2900 SEMICONDUCTOR DR

SANTA CLARA CA 95051-0606

27264

MOLEX INC

2222 WELLINGTON COURT

LISLE IL 60532-1613

2K262

BOYD CORPORATION

6136 NE 87TH AVENUE

PORTLAND, OR 97220

30983

MEPCOPAL

11468 SORRENTO VALLEY ROAD

SAN DIEGO CA 92121

84

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Replaceable Electrical Parts

CROSS INDEX - MFR. CODE NUMBER TO MANUFACTURER


Mfr.
Code

Manufacturer

Address

City, State, Zip Code

31918

ITT CANNON SWITCH PRODUCTS

8081 WALLACE RD

EDEN PRAIRIE, MN 55344-8798

32997

BOURNS INC
TRIMPOT DIV

1200 COLUMBIA AVE

RIVERSIDE CA 92507-2114

34371

HARRIS CORP
HARRIS SEMICONDUCTOR PRODUCTS
GROUP

200 PALM BAY BLVD


PO BOX 883

MELBOURNE FL 32919

4T165

NEC ELECTRONICS USA INC


ELECTRON DIV

401 ELLIS ST
PO BOX 7241

MOUNTAIN VIEW CA 94039

50139

ALLEN-BRADLEY CO
ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS

1414 ALLEN BRADLEY DR

EL PASO TX 79936

50434

HEWLETT-PACKARD CO
OPTOELECTRONICS DIV

370 W TRIMBLE RD

SAN JOSE CA 95131

52769

SPRAGUE-GOODMAN ELECTRONICS INC

134 FULTON AVE

GARDEN CITY PARK NY 11040-5352

53387

MINNESOTA MINING MFG CO

PO BOX 2963

AUSTIN TX 78769-2963

54583

TDK ELECTRONICS CORP

12 HARBOR PARK DR

PORT WASHINGTON NY 11550

54937

DEYOUNG MFG INC

12920 NE 125TH WAY

KIRKLAND, WA 98034

55335

JKL COMPONENTS CORP

13343 PAXTON STREET

PACOIMA CA 91331

55680

NICHICON /AMERICA/ CORP

927 E STATE PKY

SCHAUMBURG IL 60195-4526

56845

DALE ELECTRONICS INC

2300 RIVERSIDE BLVD


PO BOX 74

NORFOLK NE 68701-2242

57668

ROHM CORP

8 WHATNEY
PO BOX 19515

IRVINE CA 92713

60386

SQUIRES ELECTRONICS

503 N 13TH AVE

CORNELIUS, OR 97113

61429

FOX ELECTRONICS
FOX ENTERPRISES INC

PO BOX 1078

CAPE CORAL FL 33910-1078

62643

UNITED CHEMICON INC

9801 W HIGGINS ST
SUITE 430

ROSEMONT, IL 60018-4771

62703

MICRO QUALITY SEMICONDUCTOR

1000 N SHILOH RD
PO BOX 6676

GARLAND, TX 75040

65654

CHRISTIANA INDUSTRIES CORP

6500 N CLARK ST

CHICAGO IL 62606-4002

75498

MULTICOMP INC

3005 SW 154TH TERRACE


SUITE #3

BEAVERTON, OR 97005

80009

TEKTRONIX INC

14150 SW KARL BRAUN DR


PO BOX 500

BEAVERTON OR 97077-0001

84411

AMERICAN SHIZUKI CORP


OGALLALA OPERATIONS

301 WEST O ST

OGALLALA NE 69153-1844

91637

DALE ELECTRONICS INC

2064 12TH AVE


PO BOX 609

COLUMBUS NE 68601-3632

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

85

Replaceable Electrical Parts

86

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Name & Description

A1

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY CONTROL

A3

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY DRIVER

A4

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:FRONT PANEL

A5

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU

A9

FLEX CIRCUIT:BEZEL

A62

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:FRONT PANEL MODULE

A63

POWER SUPPLY

A64

Mfr. Part No.

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG

A2

Mfr.
Code

ELECTRON TUBE:CRT

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

87

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

A1

671-2219-02 B010100

B010362

A1

671-2219-03 B010363

B010363

A1

671-2219-04 B010364

B011312

A1

671-2219-05 B011313

B011920

A1

671-2219-06 B011921

B012452

A1

671-2219-07 B012453

A1

671-2219-02 B010100

B010348

A1

671-2219-03 B010349

B010349

A1

671-2219-04 B010350

B011151

A1

671-2219-05 B011152

B011803

A1

671-2219-06 B011804

B011959

A1

671-2219-07 B011960

B012541

A1

671-2219-08 B012542

B013596

A1

671-2219-09 B013597

A1AT401

165-2368-00 B010100

A1AT401

165-2500-00 B011921

A1AT401

165-2368-00 B010100

B011803

A1AT401

165-2500-00 B011804

B013596

A1AT401

165-2500-03 B013597

A1AT402

165-2368-00 B010100

A1AT402

165-2500-00 B011921

A1AT402

165-2368-00 B010100

B011803

A1AT402

165-2500-00 B011804

B013596

A1AT402

165-2500-03 B013597

A1C402

285-1471-00

CAP
,FXD,PLASTIC:METALIZED FILM;0.01 MFD,10%

84411

TEK-385

A1C403

285-1472-00

CAP
,FXD,PLASTIC:METALIZED FILM;10 MFD,10%

84411

TEK-385

A1C404

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A1C405

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

88

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

B011920

B011920

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG
(TAS455 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG
(TAS455 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG
(TAS455 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG
(TAS455 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG
(TAS455 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG
(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

671221902

80009

671221903

80009

671221904

80009

671221905

80009

671221906

80009

671221907

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG
(TAS465 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG
(TAS465 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG
(TAS465 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG
(TAS465 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG
(TAS465 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG
(TAS465 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG
(TAS465 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG
(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

671221902

80009

671221903

80009

671221904

80009

671221905

80009

671221906

80009

671221907

80009

671221908

80009

671221909

MICROCKT,HYBRID:ATTENUATOR/PREAMP
,H2368
(TAS455 ONLY)
MICROCKT,HYBRID:ATTENUATOR/PREAMP
(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

165236800

80009

165250000

MICROCKT,HYBRID:ATTENUATOR/PREAMP
,H2368
(TAS465 ONLY)
MICROCKT,HYBRID:ATTENUATOR/PREAMP
(TAS465 ONLY)
MICROCKT,HYBRID:ATTENUATOR/PREAMP
(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

165236800

80009

165250000

80009

165250003

MICROCKT,HYBRID:ATTENUATOR/PREAMP
,H2368
(TAS455 ONLY)
MICROCKT,HYBRID:ATTENUATOR/PREAMP
(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

165236800

80009

165250000

MICROCKT,HYBRID:ATTENUATOR/PREAMP
,H2368
(TAS465 ONLY)
MICROCKT,HYBRID:ATTENUATOR/PREAMP
(TAS465 ONLY)
MICROCKT,HYBRID:ATTENUATOR/PREAMP
(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

165236800

80009

165250000

80009

165250003

Name & Description

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

A1C406

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Name & Description

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A1C407

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A1C408

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A1C409

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A1C410

281-0797-00 B010100

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;15PF,10%
(TAS455 ONLY)

04222

SA102A150KAA

A1C410

281-0936-00 B011313

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;39PF,5%,100V
(TAS455 ONLY)

04222

SA102A390JAA

A1C410

281-0797-00 B010100

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;15PF,10%
(TAS465 ONLY)

04222

SA102A150KAA

A1C410

281-0936-00 B011152

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;39PF,5%,100V
(TAS465 ONLY)

04222

SA102A390JAA

A1C411

285-1473-00

CAP
,FXD,PLASTIC:METALIZED FILM;0.1 MFD,10%

84411

TEK-385

A1C412

281-0788-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;470PF,10%,100V

04222

SA102C471KAA

A1C413

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A1C415

281-0788-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;470PF,10%,100V

04222

SA102C471KAA

A1C416

281-0788-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;470PF,10%,100V

04222

SA102C471KAA

A1C417

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A1C418

281-0938-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:20PF,2%,500V

04222

MA107A200GAA

A1C419

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A1C420

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A1C421

281-0776-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;120PF,5%,100V

04222

SA102A121JAA

A1C424

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A1C426

290-0944-01

CAP
,FXD,ELCTLT:220UF,20%,10V

0H1N5

CEBSM1C221M-T4

A1C427

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A1C429

290-0944-01

CAP
,FXD,ELCTLT:220UF,20%,10V

0H1N5

CEBSM1C221M-T4

A1C430

283-0177-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:1UF,+80-20%,25V

04222

SR303E105ZAA

A1C431

290-0944-01

CAP
,FXD,ELCTLT:220UF,20%,10V

0H1N5

CEBSM1C221M-T4

A1C432

290-0944-01

CAP
,FXD,ELCTLT:220UF,20%,10V

0H1N5

CEBSM1C221M-T4

A1C435

281-0788-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;470PF,10%,100V

04222

SA102C471KAA

A1C436

281-0811-00 B010100

04222

SA102A100KAA

A1C436

281-0788-00 B010363

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL,10PF,10%,100V
(TAS455 ONLY)
CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;470PF,10%,100V
(TAS455 ONLY)

04222

SA102C471KAA

A1C436

281-0811-00 B010100

04222

SA102A100KAA

A1C436

281-0788-00 B010349

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL,10PF,10%,100V
(TAS465 ONLY)
CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;470PF,10%,100V
(TAS465 ONLY)

04222

SA102C471KAA

A1C437

290-1198-00

A1C438

283-0167-02 B010100

A1C438

283-0177-05 B012453

B011312

B011151

B010362

B010348

CAP
,FXD,ELCTLT:100UF,20%,10VAC
B012452

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

55680

UET1A101MPH

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,10%,100V
(TAS455 ONLY)
CAP
,FXD,CER DI:1UF,+80-20%,25V SQUARE,MI
(TAS455 ONLY)

04222

SR591C104KAAAP1

04222

SR303E105ZAAAP1

89

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

Mfr.
Code

A1C438

283-0167-02 B010100

Mfr. Part No.

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,10%,100V
(TAS465 ONLY)
CAP
,FXD,CER DI:1UF,+80-20%,25V SQUARE,MI
(TAS465 ONLY)

04222

SR591C104KAAAP1

A1C438

283-0177-05 B011960

04222

SR303E105ZAAAP1

A1CR401
A1J10

152-0141-02

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF

27014

FDH9427

131-3731-00

CONN,RF JACK:BNC,;50 OHM,FEMALE,ST

24931

28JR377-1

A1J11

131-3731-00

CONN,RF JACK:BNC,;50 OHM,FEMALE,STR

24931

28JR377-1

A1J20

131-3731-00

CONN,RF JACK:BNC,;50 OHM,FEMALE,STR

24931

28JR377-1

A1J50

131-5346-00

CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,2 X 20,0.1 CTR

00779

104338-8

A1J66

131-5419-00

CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,1 X 2,0.1 CTR

00779

644486-2

A1J67

131-5347-00

CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,RTANG,1 X 23,0.1 CTR

00779

2-103673-2

A1J68

131-5419-00

CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,1 X 2,0.1 CTR

00779

644486-2

A1K401

148-0249-00

RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C,COIL 5VDC,178 OHM

4T165

EA2-5NU

A1L401

108-1319-00

INDUCTOR,FIXED:33UH,10%,1.8A

54583

TSL1110-330K 1R

A1L402

108-1319-00

INDUCTOR,FIXED:33UH,10%,1.8A

54583

TSL1110-330K 1R

A1L403

108-1352-00

COIL,RF:FIXED,22UH,10%

54583

SPT0305-220K

A1L404

108-1352-00

COIL,RF:FIXED,22UH,10%

54583

SPT0305-220K

A1L405

108-1319-00

INDUCTOR,FIXED:33UH,10%,1.8A

54583

TSL1110-330K 1R

A1L406

108-1319-00

INDUCTOR,FIXED:33UH,10%,1.8A

54583

TSL1110-330K 1R

A1Q401

151-0830-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;15V,50MA,600MHZ

27014

4392/X43153A

A1Q402

151-0830-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;15V,50MA,600MHZ

27014

4392/X43153A

A1Q403

151-0830-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;15V,50MA,600MHZ

27014

4392/X43153A

A1Q404

151-1042-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:JFET,N-CH;6V,10-15MA

04713

SPF627M2

A1Q405

151-1042-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:JFET,N-CH;6V,10-15MA

04713

SPF627M2

A1Q406

151-1042-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:JFET,N-CH;6V,10-15MA

04713

SPF627M2

A1Q407

151-0190-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA

04713

2N3904

A1Q408

151-0190-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA

04713

2N3904

A1R401

313-1390-00

RES,FXD,FILM:39 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-39R00J

A1R402

313-1103-00

RES,FXD,FILM:10K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10001J

A1R403

313-1103-00

RES,FXD,FILM:10K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10001J

A1R404

313-1103-00

RES,FXD,FILM:10K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10001J

A1R405

322-3446-00

RES,FXD,FILM:432K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2F43202F

A1R406

322-3446-00

RES,FXD,FILM:432K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2F43202F

A1R407

322-3398-00

RES,FXD,FILM:137K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G13702FT

A1R408

322-3260-00

RES,FXD,FILM:4.99K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G49900F

A1R409

322-3030-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;20 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50G20R00F

A1R410

322-3177-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;681 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2G681R0F

A1R411

322-3083-00

RES,FXD,FILM:71.5 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G71R50F

A1R412

322-3177-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;681 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2G681R0F

A1R413

313-1103-00

RES,FXD,FILM:10K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10001J

A1R414

322-3177-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;681 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2G681R0F

810

Serial No.
Effective Dscont
B011959

Name & Description

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

A1R415

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Name & Description

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

313-1102-00

RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10000J

A1R417

313-1102-00

RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10000J

A1R418

313-1102-00

RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10000J

A1R419

313-1390-00

RES,FXD,FILM:39 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-39R00J

A1R420

313-1102-00

RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10000J

A1R421

313-1015-00

RES,FXD,FILM:1.5 OHM,5%,0.2W

57668

TR20JT6801E5

A1R425

313-1101-00

RES,FXD,FILM:100 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-100R0J

A1R426

313-1082-00

RES,FXD,FILM:8.2 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-8R200J;

A1R427

313-1102-00 B010364

RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,5%,0.2W
(TAS455 ONLY)

91637

CCF50-2-10000J

A1R427

313-1102-00 B010350

RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,5%,0.2W
(TAS465 ONLY)

91637

CCF50-2-10000J

A1R428

313-1683-00 B010364

RES,FXD,FILM:68K OHM,5%,0.2W
(TAS455 ONLY)

91637

CCF50-2-6800IJ

A1R428

313-1683-00 B010350

RES,FXD,FILM:68K OHM,5%,0.2W
(TAS465 ONLY)

91637

CCF50-2-6800IJ

A1R429

322-3260-00 B010364

RES,FXD,FILM:4.99K OHM,1%,0.2W
(TAS455 ONLY)

91637

CCF501G49900F

A1R429

322-3260-00 B010350

RES,FXD,FILM:4.99K OHM,1%,0.2W
(TAS465 ONLY)

91637

CCF501G49900F

A1U403

156-0355-00

IC,LINEAR:7-TRANSISTOR,COMMON EMITTER

34371

CA3081

A1U404

156-0355-00

IC,LINEAR:7-TRANSISTOR,COMMON EMITTER

34371

CA3081

A1U405

165-2446-00 B010100

80009

165244600

A1U405

165-2446-01 B011313

MICROCKT,HYBRID:ANALOG/TRIGGER/SWEEP
(TAS455 ONLY)
MICROCKT,HYBRID:ANALOG/TRIGGER/SWEEP
(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

165244601

A1U405

165-2446-00 B010100

80009

165244600

A1U405

165-2446-01 B011152

80009

165244601

A1U405

165-2446-02

80009

165244602

A1U405

165-2446-03 B013597

MICROCKT,HYBRID:ANALOG/TRIGGER/SWEEP
(TAS465 ONLY)
MICROCKT,HYBRID:ANALOG/TRIGGER/SWEEP
(TAS465 ONLY)
MICROCKT,HYBRID:ANALOG/TRIGGER/SWEEP
(TAS465 ONLY)
MICROCKT,HYBRID:ANALOG/TRIGGER/SWEEP
(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

165244603

A1U406

156-2605-00

IC,MISC:HCMOS,ANALOG MUX;8 CHAN,125 OHM

04713

MC74HC4051N/J

A1U407

156-1631-01

IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VOLT REG;ADJ,100MA,2.2%

01295

TL431CLPM

A1W401

131-0566-00

BUS,CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225L

24546

OMA0207

A1W406

131-0566-00

BUS,CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225L

24546

OMA0207

A1W429

196-3064-00 B010364

LEAD,ELECTRICAL:26 AWG,4.0 L,1-N


(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

196306400

A1W429

196-3064-00 B010350

LEAD,ELECTRICAL:26 AWG,4.0 L,1-N


(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

196306400

B011312

B011151

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

811

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Mfr.
Code

A2

671-2222-00 B010100

Mfr. Part No.

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY CONTROL


(TAS455 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY CONTROL
(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

671222200

A2

671-2222-01 B010541

80009

671222201

A2

671-2222-00 B010100

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY CONTROL


(TAS465 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY CONTROL
(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

671222200

A2

671-2222-01 B010516

80009

671222201

A2C1
A2DS1

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

150-0168-00

LAMP
,INCAND:14V,0.08A,WEDGE BASE

55335

73

A2DS3

150-0168-00

LAMP
,INCAND:14V,0.08A,WEDGE BASE

55335

73

A2J80

131-5156-00

CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,1 X 2,0.1 CTR

00779

103669-1

A2J82

131-0608-00

TERMINAL,PIN:PRESSFIT/PCB,;MALE,STR
(QTY 2)

22526

48283-018

B010540

B010515

Name & Description

A2J84

131-5157-00

CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,1 X 5,0.1 CTR

00779

103669-4

A2Q1

151-0736-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,600MA

0JR04

2N4401

A2Q3

151-0736-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,600MA

0JR04

2N4401

A2R1

313-1051-00

RES,FXD,FILM:5.1 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CT3-5R100J

A2R3

313-1051-00

RES,FXD,FILM:5.1 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CT3-5R100J

A2R4

311-2485-00 B010100

RES,VAR,NONWW:2K OHM,20%,0.5W
(TAS455 ONLY)
RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET;2K OHM,20%,0.5W
(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

311248500

32997

3386P-FE7-202

RES,VAR,NONWW:2K OHM,20%,0.5W
(TAS465 ONLY)
RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET;2K OHM,20%,0.5W
(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

311248500

32997

3386P-FE7-202

B010540

311-2501-00 B010541

A2R4

311-2485-00 B010100
311-2501-00 B010516

B010515

A2R5

311-2344-00

RES,VAR,NONWW:CKT BD,4.7K OHM,20%,1.25W

30983

P2322-510-90062

A2R6

311-2344-00

RES,VAR,NONWW:CKT BD,4.7K OHM,20%,1.25W

30983

P2322-510-90062

A2R7

311-1500-00

RES,VAR,NONWW:PNL,5K OHM,0.5W

12697

W-8097

A2R8

311-2344-00

RES,VAR,NONWW:CKT BD,4.7K OHM,20%,1.25W

30983

P2322-510-90062

A2R9

311-2344-00

RES,VAR,NONWW:CKT BD,4.7K OHM,20%,1.25W

30983

P2322-510-90062

A2X1

352-1008-00

HOLDER,LAMP:PRESS-IN MOUNT,RIGHT ANGLE

65654

CIC 6500L

A2X3

352-1008-00

HOLDER,LAMP:PRESS-IN MOUNT,RIGHT ANGLE

65654

CIC 6500L

812

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Mfr.
Code

A3

671-2540-01 B010100

B010274

Mfr. Part No.

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY DRIVER


(TAS455 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY DRIVER
(TAS455 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY DRIVER
(TAS455 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY DRIVER
(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

671254001

A3

671-2540-02 B010275

B011567

80009

671254002

A3

671-2540-03 B011568

B011920

80009

671254003

A3

671-2540-04 B011921

80009

671254004

A3

671-2223-01 B010100

B010260

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY DRIVER


(TAS465 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY DRIVER
(TAS465 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY DRIVER
(TAS465 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY DRIVER
(TAS465 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY DRIVER
(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

671222301

A3

671-2223-02 B010261

B011393

80009

671222302

A3

671-2223-03 B011394

B011803

80009

671222303

A3

671-2904-01 B011804

B012561

80009

671290401

A3

671-2904-02 B012562

80009

671290402

A3C102
A3C104

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A3C105

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A3C106

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A3C107

283-0203-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.47UF,20%,50V

04222

SR305C474MAA

A3C108

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A3C109

281-0762-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:27PF,20%,100V

04222

SA102A270MAA

A3C110

281-0762-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:27PF,20%,100V

04222

SA102A270MAA

A3C111

283-0331-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:43PF,2%,100V
(TAS465 ONLY)

18796

DD106B10NP0430J

A3C112

283-0339-00 B010100

04222

SR305C224KAA

A3C112

283-0339-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.22UF,10%,50V
(TAS455 ONLY)
CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.22UF,10%,50V
(TAS465 ONLY)

04222

SR305C224KAA

A3C113

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A3C116

283-0331-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:43PF,2%,100V
(TAS465 ONLY)

18796

DD106B10NP0430J

A3C117

283-0339-00 B010100

04222

SR305C224KAA

A3C117

283-0339-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.22UF,10%,50V
(TAS455 ONLY)
CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.22UF,10%,50V
(TAS465 ONLY)

04222

SR305C224KAA

A3C118

283-0108-02

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:220PF,10%,200V
(TAS465 ONLY)

04222

SR075A221KAAAP1

A3C119

283-0108-02

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:220PF,10%,200V
(TAS465 ONLY)

04222

SR075A221KAAAP1

A3C120

283-0159-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:18PF,5%,50V
(TAS 455 ONLY)

04222

SR155A180JAA

A3C121

281-0306-00

CAP
,VAR,CER DI:3.3-20PF

52769

GKU 18000

A3C122

281-0306-00

CAP
,VAR,CER DI:3.3-20PF
(TAS465 ONLY)

52769

GKU 18000

A3C123

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

B011920

B011920

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

Name & Description

813

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

A3C124

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Name & Description

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A3C125

281-0759-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;22PF,10%,100V

04222

SA102A220KAA

A3C126

281-0759-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;22PF,10%,100V

04222

SA102A220KAA

A3C128

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A3C130

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A3C201

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A3C203

285-1460-00

CAP
,FXD,MTLZD:0.1UF,20%,250V,5MM LEAD SPAC

TK1913

MKS 2 0.1/250/2

A3C204

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A3C205

285-1460-00

CAP
,FXD,MTLZD:0.1UF,20%,250V,5MM LEAD SPAC

TK1913

MKS 2 0.1/250/2

A3C207

285-1460-00

CAP
,FXD,MTLZD:0.1UF,20%,250V,5MM LEAD SPAC

TK1913

MKS 2 0.1/250/2

A3C210

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V,0.100 X

04222

SA105C223MAA

A3C211

285-1460-00

CAP
,FXD,MTLZD:0.1UF,20%,250V,5MM LEAD SPAC

TK1913

MKS 2 0.1/250/2

A3C214

281-0765-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:100PF,5%,100V

04222

SA102A101JAA

A3C216

281-0537-00 B011568

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.68PF,20%,600V
(TAS455 ONLY)

54583

DA12COG2HR68M

A3C216

281-0537-00 B011394

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.68PF,20%,600V
(TAS465 ONLY)

54583

DA12COG2HR68M

A3C217

281-0537-00 B010100

B010274 CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.68PF,20%,600V
(TAS455 ONLY)

54583

DA12COG2HR68M

A3C217

281-0537-00 B010100

B010260 CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.68PF,20%,600V
(TAS465 ONLY)

54583

DA12COG2HR68M

A3C218

281-0064-00 B010275

B011567

CAP
,VAR,PLASTIC:0.25-1.5PF,600V
(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

281006400

A3C218

281-0064-00 B010261

B011393

CAP
,VAR,PLASTIC:0.25-1.5PF,600V
(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

281006400

A3C219

285-1460-00

CAP
,FXD,MTLZD:0.1UF,20%,250V,5MM LEAD SPAC

TK1913

MKS 2 0.1/250/2

A3C221

283-0341-01

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.047UF,10%,100V

04222

SR301C473KAAAP1

A3C222

281-0759-00 B010100

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,22PF,10%,100V
(TAS455 ONLY)
CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;5.6PF,+/-0.5PF,100V
(TAS455 ONLY)

04222

SA102ZA220KAA

04222

SA102A5R6DAA

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,22PF,10%,100V
(TAS465 ONLY)
CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;5.6PF,+/-0.5PF,100V
(TAS465 ONLY)

04222

SA102ZA220KAA

04222

SA102A5R6DAA

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1.5PF,+/-0.25PF,100V
(TAS455 ONLY)
CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.68PF,20%,600V
(TAS455 ONLY)

04222

MA101A1R5CAA

54583

DA12COG2HR68M

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1.5PF,+/-0.25PF,100V
(TAS455 ONLY)
CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.68PF,20%,600V
(TAS465 ONLY)

04222

MA101A1R5CAA

54583

DA12COG2HR68M

B010274

281-0810-00 B010275
A3C222

281-0759-00 B010100

B010260

281-0810-00 B010261
A3C223

281-0940-00 B010100

A3C223

281-0537-00 B010275

A3C223

281-0940-00 B010100

A3C223

281-0537-00 B010261

A3C224

281-0537-00 B010100

B010274

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.68PF,20%,600V
(TAS455 ONLY)

54583

DA12COG2HR68M

A3C224

281-0537-00 B010100

B010260

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.68PF,20%,600V
(TAS465 ONLY)

54583

DA12COG2HR68M

814

B010274

B010260

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

A3C301

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Name & Description

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

281-0771-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:2200PF,20%,200V

04222

SA102C222MAA

A3C302

285-1460-00

CAP
,FXD,MTLZD:0.1UF,20%,250V,5MM LEAD SPAC

TK1913

MKS 2 0.1/250/2

A3C303

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A3C304

285-1460-00

CAP
,FXD,MTLZD:0.1UF,20%,250V,5MM LEAD SPAC

TK1913

MKS 2 0.1/250/2

A3C305

285-1460-00

CAP
,FXD,MTLZD:0.1UF,20%,250V,5MM LEAD SPAC

TK1913

MKS 2 0.1/250/2

A3C306

285-1460-00

CAP
,FXD,MTLZD:0.1UF,20%,250V,5MM LEAD SPAC

TK1913

MKS 2 0.1/250/2

A3C308

281-0762-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:27PF,20%,100V

04222

SA102A270MAA

A3C309

281-0903-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:3.9PF,100V

04222

SA102A3R9DAA

A3C310

285-1460-00

CAP
,FXD,MTLZD:0.1UF,20%,250V

TK1913

MKS 2 0.1/250/2

A3C311

285-1184-00

CAP
,FXD,MTLZD:0.01 UF,20%,4000V

24165

430P591

A3C312

285-1040-00

CAP
,FXD,PLASTIC:1200PF,10%,4000V

84411

TEK-134-122940

A3C313

281-0771-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:2200PF,20%,200V

04222

SA102C222MAA

A3C314

283-0279-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.001UF,20%,3000V

18796

DHR12Y5S102M3KV

A3C315

285-1184-00

CAP
,FXD,MTLZD:0.01 UF,20%,4000V

24165

430P591

A3C316

285-1040-00

CAP
,FXD,PLASTIC:1200PF,10%,4000V

84411

TEK-134-122940

A3C317

281-0903-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:3.9PF,100V

04222

SA102A3R9DAA

A3C319

281-0909-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.022UF,20%,50V

04222

SA105C223MAA

A3C320

290-0776-01

CAP
,FXD,ELCTLT:22UF,20%,10WVDC

55680

UVX1A220MAA1TD

A3C321

285-1460-00

CAP
,FXD,MTLZD:0.1UF,20%,250V

TK1913

MKS 2 0.1/250/2

A3C322

283-0203-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.47UF,20%,50V

04222

SR305C474MAA

A3C323

283-0203-00

CAP
,FXD,CER DI:0.47UF,20%,50V

04222

SR305C474MAA

A3CR100

152-0066-00

DIODE,RECT:,400V,1A

05828

GP10G-020

A3CR101

152-0066-00

DIODE,RECT:,400V,1A

05828

GP10G-020

A3CR102

152-0066-00

DIODE,RECT:,400V,1A

05828

GP10G-020

A3CR201

152-0141-02

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF

27014

FDH9427

A3CR202

152-0141-02

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF

27014

FDH9427

A3CR301

152-0141-02

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF

27014

FDH9427

A3CR302

152-0400-00

DIODE,RECT:,FAST RCVRY;400V,1A,200NS

14552

MB2501

A3CR303

152-0400-00

DIODE,RECT:,FAST RCVRY;400V,1A,200NS

14552

MB2501

A3CR304

152-0400-00

DIODE,RECT:,FAST RCVRY;400V,1A,200NS

14552

MB2501

A3CR305

152-0141-02

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF

27014

FDH9427

A3CR306

152-0400-00

DIODE,RECT:,FAST RCVRY;400V,1A,200NS

14552

MB2501

A3CR307

152-0141-02

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF

27014

FDH9427

A3CR308

152-0141-02

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF

27014

FDH9427

A3DS301

150-0035-00

LAMP
,GLOW:90V MAX,0.3MA,AID-T,WIRE LD

TK0213

JH005/3011JA

A3DS302

150-0035-00

LAMP
,GLOW:90V MAX,0.3MA,AID-T,WIRE LD

TK0213

JH005/3011JA

A3J69

131-5419-00

CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,1 X 2,0.1 CT

00779

644486-2

A3J70

131-5349-00

CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,RTANG,1 X 13,0.156 CTR

00779

1-640387-3

A3J71

131-5350-00

CONN,HDR PWR:PCB;MALE,RTANG,1 X 2

00779

640387-2

A3J72

131-0589-00

TERMINAL,PIN:PRESSFIT/PCB,;MALE,STR
(QTY 4)

22526

48283-087

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

815

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

A3J73

131-0589-00

A3J74
A3J75

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

TERMINAL,PIN:PRESSFIT/PCB,;MALE,STR
(QTY 5)

22526

48283-087

131-0589-00

TERMINAL,PIN:PRESSFIT/PCB,;MALE,STR
(QTY 3)

22526

48283-087

131-0589-00

TERMINAL,PIN:PRESSFIT/PCB,;MALE,STR
(QTY 3)

22526

48283-087

Name & Description

A3J80

131-5348-00

CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,RTANG,1 X 2,0.1 CTR

00779

103672-1

A3L101

120-1906-00

TRANSFORMER,RF:COIL,RF,TAPPED INDUCTOR

0JR03

120-1906-00

A3L102

120-1906-00

TRANSFORMER,RF:COIL,RF,TAPPED INDUCTOR

0JR03

120-1906-00

A3L103

108-1352-00

COIL,RF:FIXED,22UH,10%

54583

SPT0305-220K

A3L104

108-0408-01

COIL,RF:FIXED,91NH ON FORM

0JR03

108-0408-01

A3L105

108-0170-02

COIL,RF:FIXED,360NH

0JR03

108-0170-02

A3L106

108-0736-01

COIL,RF:FIXED,828NH

0JR03

108-0736-01

A3L107

108-0736-01

COIL,RF:FIXED,828NH

0JR03

108-0736-01

A3L108

108-0170-02

COIL,RF:FIXED,360NH

0JR03

108-0170-02

A3L109

108-0436-00

COIL,RF:FIXED,240UH ON FORM

0JR03

OBD

A3L110

108-0408-01

COIL,RF:FIXED,91NH

0JR03

108-0408-01

A3L111

108-1352-00

COIL,RF:FIXED,22UH,10%

54583

SPT0305-220K

A3L112

108-1352-00

COIL,RF:FIXED,22UH,10%

54583

SPT0305-220K

A3L113

108-1352-00

COIL,RF:FIXED,22UH,10%

54583

SPT0305-220K

A3L300

108-1352-00

COIL,RF:FIXED,22UH,10%

54583

SPT0305-220K

A3Q101

151-0411-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;30V,400MA,1.2GHZ 04713

2N5943

A3Q102

151-0411-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;30V,400MA,1.2GHZ 04713

2N5943

A3Q201

151-0711-02

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;25V,50MA,650MHZ

MPSH10RLRP

A3Q202

151-0711-02

A3Q204

151-0965-00 B010100

A3Q204

151-0190-00 B010275

A3Q204

151-0965-00 B010100

A3Q204

151-0190-00 B010261

A3Q205
A3Q206

04713

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;25V,50MA,650MHZ

04713

MPSH10RLRP

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;10V,80MA,6.0GHZ
(TAS455 ONLY)
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA
(TAS455 ONLY)

04713

MP3571

04713

2N3904

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;10V,80MA,6.0GHZ
(TAS465 ONLY)
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA
(TAS465 ONLY)

04713

MP3571

04713

2N3904

151-0347-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;160V,600MA

0JR04

2N5551

151-0347-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;160V,600MA

0JR04

2N5551

A3Q208

151-0350-03

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP;150V,600MA

27014

S44295

A3Q209

151-0350-03

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP;150V,600MA

27014

S44295

A3Q210

151-0271-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP;15V,30MA,2.0GHZ

04713

MPSH69

A3Q211

151-0271-00 B010275

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP;15V,30MA,2.0GHZ
(TAS455 ONLY)

04713

MPSH69

A3Q211

151-0271-00 B010261

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP;15V,30MA,2.0GHZ
(TAS465 ONLY)

04713

MPSH69

A3Q212

151-0190-00 B010275

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200M
(TAS455 ONLY)

04713

2N3904

816

B010274

B010260

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Mfr.
Code

A3Q212

151-0190-00 B010261

Mfr. Part No.

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200M
(TAS465 ONLY)

04713

2N3904

A3Q301
A3Q302

151-0188-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP;40V,200MA

04713

2N3906

151-0188-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP;40V,200MA

04713

2N3906

A3Q303

151-0190-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA

04713

2N3904

A3Q304

151-0190-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA

04713

2N3904

A3Q307

151-0199-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP;12V,80MA,SWITCH

04713

MPS3640

A3Q308

151-0350-03

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP;150V,600MA

27014

S44295

A3Q360

151-0749-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP;400V,500MA

04713

MPSA94

A3Q361

151-0749-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP;400V,500MA

04713

MPSA94

A3R101

322-3001-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G10R00F

A3R102

322-3001-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G10R00F

A3R103

313-1202-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-20000J

A3R104

322-3217-00

RES,FXD,FILM:1.78K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G17800F

A3R105

313-1102-00

RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10000J

A3R106

322-3085-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;75 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G75R00F

A3R107

322-3085-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;75 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G75R00F

A3R108

313-1470-00

RES,FXD,FILM:47 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-47R00J

A3R109

313-1470-00

RES,FXD,FILM:47 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-47R00J

A3R111

311-2234-00

RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET;5K OHM,20%,0.5W

TK2073

GF06UT2 502 M L

A3R112

311-2230-00

RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET;500 OHM,20%,0.5W

TK2073

GF06UT2 501 M L

A3R113

322-3085-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;75 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G75R00F

A3R114

322-3085-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;75 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G75R00F

A3R115

313-1202-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-20000J

A3R116

313-1103-00

RES,FXD,FILM:10K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10001J

A3R117

313-1103-00

RES,FXD,FILM:10K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10001J

A3R120

313-1103-00

RES,FXD,FILM:10K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10001J

A3R121

313-1103-00

RES,FXD,FILM:10K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10001J

A3R122

307-1606-00

RES,FXD FILM:METAL,FILM,221 OHM,1%

56845

CPF-3-F2210F-T/

A3R123

307-1606-00

RES,FXD FILM:METAL,FILM,221 OHM,1%

56845

CPF-3-F2210F-T/

A3R124

308-0075-00

RES,FXD,WW:100 OHM,5%,3W

91637

CW2B-100R0J-T/R

A3R125

322-3068-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;49.9 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G49R90F

A3R126

313-1015-00 B010100

57668

TR20JT6801E5

A3R126

131-1817-01 B011921

RES,FXD,FILM:1.5 OHM,5%,0.2W
(TAS455 ONLY)
BUS,CONDUCTOR:22AWG,2.0 TO 2.125 SPACING
(TAS455 ONLY)

TK1492

ORDER BY DESC

A3R126

313-1015-00

RES,FXD,FILM:1.5 OHM,5%,0.2W
(TAS465 ONLY)

57668

TR20JT6801E5

A3R127

322-3097-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G100R0F

A3R128

322-3085-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;75 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G75R00F

A3R129

322-3001-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G10R00F

A3R130

322-3068-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;49.9 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G49R90F

B011920

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

Name & Description

817

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

Mfr.
Code

A3R131

313-1015-00 B010100

Mfr. Part No.

RES,FXD,FILM:1.5 OHM,5%,0.2W
(TAS455 ONLY)
BUS,CONDUCTOR:22AWG,2.0 TO 2.125 SPACING
(TAS455 ONLY)

57668

TR20JT6801E5

A3R131

131-1817-01 B011921

TK1492

ORDER BY DESC

A3R131

313-1015-00

RES,FXD,FILM:1.5 OHM,5%,0.2W
(TAS465 ONLY)

57668

TR20JT6801E5

A3R132

322-3097-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G100R0F

A3R133

322-3085-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;75 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G75R00F

A3R134

322-3062-00

RES,FXD,FILM:43.2 OHM,1%,0.2W

57668

RB20FXE43E2

A3R135

322-3001-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G10R00F

A3R138

313-1027-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CT3-2R700J

A3R139

322-3039-00

RES,FXD,FILM:24.9 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-G24R90F

A3R140

311-2230-00

RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET;500 OHM,20%,0.5W

TK2073

GF06UT2 501 M L

A3R141

311-2231-00

RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET;1K OHM,20%,0.5W
(TAS465 ONLY)

TK2073

GF06UT2 102 M L

A3R142

313-1027-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CT3-2R700J

A3R144

322-3001-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W


(TAS465 ONLY)

91637

CCF501G10R00F

A3R145

322-3001-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G10R00F

A3R147

322-3085-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;75 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G75R00F

A3R148

322-3085-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;75 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G75R00F

A3R149

313-1027-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CT3-2R700J

A3R150

313-1027-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CT3-2R700J

A3R151

322-3226-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G22100F

A3R152

313-1202-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-20000J

A3R153

322-3039-00

RES,FXD,FILM:24.9 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-G24R90F

A3R154

311-2231-00

RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET;1K OHM,20%,0.5W

TK2073

GF06UT2 102 M L

A3R155

313-1027-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CT3-2R700J

A3R156

313-1027-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CT3-2R700J

A3R157

313-1027-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CT3-2R700J

A3R201

322-3402-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;150K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50G15002F

A3R202

322-3402-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;150K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50G15002F

A3R205

313-1682-00

RES,FXD,FILM:6.8K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-68000J

A3R206

313-1682-00

RES,FXD,FILM:6.8K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-68000J

A3R207

313-1470-00

RES,FXD,FILM:47 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-47R00J

A3R210

313-1511-00

RES,FXD,FILM:510 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-510ROJ

A3R211

313-1511-00

RES,FXD,FILM:510 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-510ROJ

A3R212

313-1100-00

RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10R00J

A3R213

313-1100-00

RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10R00J

A3R214

313-1470-00

RES,FXD,FILM:47 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-47R00J

A3R215

313-1272-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2.7K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-27000J

A3R216

313-1272-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2.7K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-27000J

A3R217

322-3243-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;3.32K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-1-G33200F

A3R218

322-3158-00

RES,FXD,FILM:432 OHM,1%,0.2W

57668

CRB2D FXE 432

818

Serial No.
Effective Dscont
B011920

Name & Description

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

A3R219

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Name & Description

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

322-3287-00

RES,FXD,FILM:9.53K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50G95300F

A3R220

322-3371-00

RES,FXD,FILM:71.5K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50G71501F

A3R221

322-3243-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;3.32K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-1-G33200F

A3R222

322-3097-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G100R0F

A3R223

322-3097-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G100R0F

A3R224

322-3243-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;3.32K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-1-G33200F

A3R225

322-3485-00

RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G50000F

A3R226

322-3085-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;75 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G75R00F

A3R227

322-3085-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;75 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G75R00F

A3R228

322-3485-00

RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G50000F

A3R229

313-1511-00

RES,FXD,FILM:510 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-510ROJ

A3R230

322-3243-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;3.32K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-1-G33200F

A3R231

322-3085-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;75 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G75R00F

A3R232

322-3085-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;75 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G75R00F

A3R233

322-3243-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;3.32K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-1-G33200F

A3R234

322-3243-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;3.32K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-1-G33200F

A3R235

322-3485-00

RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G50000F

A3R236

322-3485-00

RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G50000F

A3R237

322-3485-00

RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G50000F

A3R238

322-3485-00

RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G50000F

A3R239

322-3243-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;3.32K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-1-G33200F

A3R240

322-3243-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;3.32K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-1-G33200F

A3R241

322-3243-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;3.32K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-1-G33200F

A3R242

322-3243-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;3.32K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-1-G33200F

A3R244

313-1027-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CT3-2R700J

A3R245

322-3243-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;3.32K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-1-G33200F

A3R246

313-1027-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CT3-2R700J

A3R255

313-1027-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CT3-2R700J

A3R256

313-1682-00

RES,FXD,FILM:6.8K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-68000J

A3R257

313-1333-00

RES,FXD,FILM:33K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-33001J

A3R258

322-3085-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;75 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G75R00F

A3R259

322-3085-00

A3R260

322-3135-00 B010100

A3R260

315-0475-00 B010275

A3R260

322-3135-00 B010100

A3R260

315-0475-00 B010261

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;75 OHM,1%,0.2W


B010274

B010260

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

91637

CCF501G75R00F

RES,FXD,FILM:249 OHM,1%,0.2W
(TAS455 ONLY)
RES,FXD,FILM:4.7M OHM,5%,0.25W
(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

322313500

TK1727

SFR25 2322-181-

RES,FXD,FILM:249 OHM,1%,0.2W
(TAS465 ONLY)
RES,FXD,FILM:4.7M OHM,5%,0.25W
(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

322313500

TK1727

SFR25 2322-181-

819

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

Mfr.
Code

A3R261

315-0475-00 B010100

B010274

Mfr. Part No.

RES,FXD,FILM:4.7M OHM,5%,0.25W
(TAS455 ONLY)

TK1727

SFR25 2322-181-

A3R261

315-0475-00 B010100

B010260

RES,FXD,FILM:4.7M OHM,5%,0.25W
(TAS465 ONLY)

TK1727

SFR25 2322-181-

A3R301
A3R303

313-1681-00

RES,FXD,FILM:680 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-680ROJ

315-0201-02

RES,FXD,CMPSN:200 OHM,5%,0.25W

50139

CB2015

A3R304

313-1203-00

RES,FXD,FILM:20K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-20001J

A3R305

315-0511-02

RES,FXD,CMPSN:510 OHM,.25W,5%

50139

CB5115 ALLEN BR

A3R306

313-1243-00

RES,FXD,FILM:24K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

R20J24K

A3R307

315-0511-02

RES,FXD,CMPSN:510 OHM,.25W,5%

50139

CB5115 ALLEN BR

A3R308

313-1333-00

RES,FXD,FILM:33K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-33001J

A3R309

313-1104-00

RES,FXD,FILM:100K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10002J

A3R310

313-1102-00

RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10000J

A3R311

313-1102-00

RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-10000J

A3R312

313-1223-00

RES,FXD,FILM:22K,OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-22001J

A3R313

313-1223-00

RES,FXD,FILM:22K,OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-22001J

A3R314

313-1203-00

RES,FXD,FILM:20K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-20001J

A3R315

313-1203-00

RES,FXD,FILM:20K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-20001J

A3R316

322-3085-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;75 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G75R00F

A3R317

322-3402-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;150K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50G15002F

A3R318

313-1681-00

RES,FXD,FILM:680 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-680ROJ

A3R321

311-2237-00

RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET;25K OHM,20%,0.5W

TK2073

GF06UT2 253 M L

A3R322

311-2239-00

RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET;100K OHM,20%,0.5W

TK2073

GF06UT2 104 M L

A3R323

311-2239-00

RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET;100K OHM,20%,0.5W

TK2073

GF06UT2 104 M L

A3R324

313-1682-00

RES,FXD,FILM:6.8K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-68000J

A3R325

315-0472-03

RES,FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W

50139

CB4725

A3R326

315-0103-03

RES,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W

50139

CB1035

A3R329

315-0625-00

RES,FXD,FILM:6.2M OHM,5%,0.25W

TK1727

SFR25 2322-181-

A3R330

313-1683-00

RES,FXD,FILM:68K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-6800IJ

A3R331

313-1823-00

RES,FXD,FILM:82K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-82001J

A3R332

313-1392-00

RES,FXD,FILM:3.9K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-39000J

A3R333

313-1392-00

RES,FXD,FILM:3.9K OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-39000J

A3R350

322-3306-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;15K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF50-2-G1502F

A3R351

315-0201-02

RES,FXD,CMPSN:200 OHM,5%,0.25W

50139

CB2015

A3R352

313-1027-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CT3-2R700J

A3R353

313-1027-00

RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 OHM,5%,0.2W

91637

CT3-2R700J

A3R360

301-0754-01

RES,FXD,CMPSN:750K OHM,5%,0.5W

50139

EB7545

A3R361

301-0394-00

RES,FXD,FILM:390K OHM,5%,0.5W

19701

5053CX 390K0J

A3R362

301-0434-00

RES,FXD,FILM:430K OHM,5%,0.5W

19701

5053CX430K0J

A3R363

301-0434-00

RES,FXD,FILM:430K OHM,5%,0.5W

19701

5053CX430K0J

A3R364

322-0481-00

RES,FXD,FILM:1M OHM,1%,0.25W

91637

CMF6042G10003F

A3R365

322-0481-00

RES,FXD,FILM:1M OHM,1%,0.25W

91637

CMF6042G10003F

820

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Name & Description

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

A3R366

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Name & Description

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

322-3322-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;22.1K OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G22101F

A3R367

301-0434-00

RES,FXD,FILM:430K OHM,5%,0.5W

19701

5053CX430K0J

A3R368

321-0385-00

RES,FXD,FILM:100K OHM,1%,0.125W

19701

5043ED100K0F

A3R369

301-0434-00

RES,FXD,FILM:430K OHM,5%,0.5W

19701

5053CX430K0J

A3R370

131-0566-00

BUS,CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225L

24546

OMA0207

A3R371

322-3097-00

RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W

91637

CCF501G100R0F

A3U101

155-0322-00

MICROCKT,LINEAR:VERTICAL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER

80009

155032200

A3U102

156-0158-00

IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP-AMP;DUAL

01295

MC1458P

A3U201

156-0158-00

IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP-AMP;DUAL

01295

MC1458P

A3VR201

152-0055-00

DIODE,ZENER:,;11V,5%,0.4W

04713

SZG35009K1 1N96

A3VR360

152-0470-00

DIODE,ZENER:,;200V,5%,0.4W

04713

1N992BRL

A3VR361

152-0470-00

DIODE,ZENER:,;200V,5%,0.4W

04713

1N992BRL

A3W66

174-2602-00

CA ASSY,SP:FLAT FLEX,;FLX,23,26 AWG,6.5 L

TK2469

174-2602-00

A3W100

131-0566-00

BUS,CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225L

24546

OMA0207

A3W300

131-0566-00

BUS,CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225L

24546

OMA0207

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

821

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

Mfr.
Code

A4

671-2220-00

Mfr. Part No.

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:FRONT PANEL


(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

671222000

A4

671-2220-00 B010100
671-2911-00 B012837

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:FRONT PANEL


(TAS465 ONLY)

80009
80009

671222000
671291100

A4C101
A4C121

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C122

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C131

290-5034-01

CAP
,FXD,ALUM:;33UF,20%,10V,5.7MM(0.224)

1W344

MVK10VC33RME60T

A4C132

290-5034-01

CAP
,FXD,ALUM:;33UF,20%,10V,5.7MM(0.224)

1W344

MVK10VC33RME60T

A4C140

283-5201-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33PF,5%,100V,NPO,1206

04222

12061A330JAT1A

A4C141

283-5201-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33PF,5%,100V,NPO,1206

04222

12061A330JAT1A

A4C202

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C304

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C305

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C400

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C401

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C402

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C403

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C404

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C405

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C406

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C407

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C408

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C409

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C420

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C421

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A4C501

283-5203-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;1000PF,10%,100V,X7R

04222

12061C102KAT1A

A4CR331

152-5018-00

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;100V,0.74VF,4NS,2.0PF

27014

MMBD1203-HIGH

A4CR332

152-5018-00

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;100V,0.74VF,4NS,2.0PF

27014

MMBD1203-HIGH

A4CR333

152-5018-00

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;100V,0.74VF,4NS,2.0PF

27014

MMBD1203-HIGH

A4CR334

152-5018-00

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;100V,0.74VF,4NS,2.0PF

27014

MMBD1203-HIGH

A4CR335

152-5018-00

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;100V,0.74VF,4NS,2.0PF

27014

MMBD1203-HIGH

A4CR336

152-5018-00

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;100V,0.74VF,4NS,2.0PF

27014

MMBD1203-HIGH

A4CR337

152-5018-00

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;100V,0.74VF,4NS,2.0PF

27014

MMBD1203-HIGH

A4CR338

152-5018-00

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;100V,0.74VF,4NS,2.0PF

27014

MMBD1203-HIGH

A4CR339

152-5018-00

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;100V,0.74VF,4NS,2.0PF

27014

MMBD1203-HIGH

A4CR500

152-5018-00

DIODE,SIG:,ULTRA FAST;100V,0.74VF,4NS,2.0PF

27014

MMBD1203-HIGH

A4DS201

150-5008-00

DIODE,OPTO:,LED;GRN,569NM,4.2MCD AT 10MA

50434

HLMP-6505-T21

A4DS202

150-5008-00

DIODE,OPTO:,LED;GRN,569NM,4.2MCD AT 10MA

50434

HLMP-6505-T21

A4DS203

150-5008-00

DIODE,OPTO:,LED;GRN,569NM,4.2MCD AT 10MA

50434

HLMP-6505-T21

A4DS204

150-5008-00

DIODE,OPTO:,LED;GRN,569NM,4.2MCD AT 10MA

50434

HLMP-6505-T21

822

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

B012836

Name & Description

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

A4DS205

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Name & Description

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

150-5008-00

DIODE,OPTO:,LED;GRN,569NM,4.2MCD AT 10MA

50434

HLMP-6505-T21

A4DS206

150-5008-00

DIODE,OPTO:,LED;GRN,569NM,4.2MCD AT 10MA

50434

HLMP-6505-T21

A4DS207

150-5008-00

DIODE,OPTO:,LED;GRN,569NM,4.2MCD AT 10MA

50434

HLMP-6505-T21

A4DS208

150-5008-00

DIODE,OPTO:,LED;GRN,569NM,4.2MCD AT 10MA

50434

HLMP-6505-T21

A4J30

131-5344-00

CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,1 X 16,0.1 CTR

00779

1-103670-5

A4J35

131-5167-00

CONN,BOX PWR:PCB,;FEMALE,STR,1 X Y

27264

09-52-3022

A4J40

131-5158-00

CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,1 X 10,0.1 CTR

00779

103669-9

A4J84

131-5157-00

CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,1 X 5,0.1 CTR

00779

103669-4

A4R101

321-5030-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;10.0K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1002FT

A4R102

321-5030-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;10.0K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1002FT

A4R103

321-5030-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;10.0K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1002FT

A4R104

321-5030-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;10.0K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1002FT

A4R106

321-5030-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;10.0K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1002FT

A4R107

321-5030-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;10.0K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1002FT

A4R108

321-5018-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;1.0K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1001FT

A4R109

321-5030-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;10.0K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1002FT

A4R140

321-5049-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;1M OHM,1%,0.125W

57668

MCR18FXEA1M

A4R201

321-5014-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK4750FT

A4R202

321-5014-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK4750FT

A4R203

321-5014-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK4750FT

A4R204

321-5014-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK4750FT

A4R205

321-5014-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK4750FT

A4R206

321-5014-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK4750FT

A4R207

321-5014-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK4750FT

A4R208

321-5014-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK4750FT

A4R300

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R301

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R302

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R303

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R304

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R305

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R306

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R307

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R330

321-5014-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK4750FT

A4R331

321-5014-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK4750FT

A4R332

321-5014-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK4750FT

A4R333

321-5014-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK4750FT

A4R334

321-5014-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK4750FT

A4R335

321-5014-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK4750FT

A4R336

321-5014-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK4750FT

A4R337

321-5014-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK4750FT

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

823

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

A4R411

Name & Description

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

321-5018-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;1.0K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1001FT

A4R412

321-5018-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;1.0K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1001FT

A4R413

321-5018-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;1.0K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1001FT

A4R414

321-5018-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;1.0K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1001FT

A4R450

311-2843-00

RES,VAR,NONWW:SHAFTLESS,SNAP IN MOUNT

32997

11508004

A4R451

311-2843-00

RES,VAR,NONWW:SHAFTLESS,SNAP IN MOUNT

32997

11508004

A4R452

311-2843-00

RES,VAR,NONWW:SHAFTLESS,SNAP IN MOUNT

32997

11508004

A4R453

311-2843-00

RES,VAR,NONWW:SHAFTLESS,SNAP IN MOUNT

32997

11508004

A4R460

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R461

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R462

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R463

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R464

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R465

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R466

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R467

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R468

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R469

321-5047-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1003FT

A4R501

321-5018-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;1.0K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1001FT

A4R503

321-5030-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;10.0K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1002FT

A4R504

321-5027-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;5.62K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK5621FT

A4R505

321-5025-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;3.92K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK3921FT

A4U202

156-5458-00

IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,LATCH;8-BIT ADDRESSABLE

04713

MC74HC259D

A4U304

156-6135-01

IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,DEMUX/DECODER;3-TO-8

0JR04

TC74HC138AFN(EL

A4U305

156-6135-01

IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,DEMUX/DECODER;3-TO-8

0JR04

TC74HC138AFN(EL

A4U420

156-5050-01

IC,MISC:HCMOS,ANALOG MUX;8-CHANNEL

1CH66

74HC4051DT

A4U421

156-5050-01

IC,MISC:HCMOS,ANALOG MUX;8-CHANNEL

1CH66

74HC4051DT

A4Y140

119-4061-00

RESONATOR,CERAM:2.4576MHZ,50VAC,0.5%

20932

KBR-2.45MS

824

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Mfr.
Code

A5

671-2221-00 B010100

B010687

Mfr. Part No.

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
(TAS455 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
(TAS455 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
(TAS455 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

671222100

A5

671-2221-01 B010688

B011482

80009

671222101

A5

671-2221-02 B011483

B011862

80009

671222102

A5

671-2221-03 B011863

80009

671222103

A5

671-2221-00 B010100

B010588

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
(TAS465 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
(TAS465 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
(TAS465 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
(TAS465 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

671222100

A5

671-2221-01 B010589

B011336

80009

671222101

A5

671-2221-02 B011337

B011621

80009

671222102

A5

671-2221-03 B011622

B013240

80009

671222103

A5

671-2221-04 B013241

80009

671222104

A5C201
A5C202

290-5034-01

CAP
,FXD,ALUM:;33UF,20%,10V,5.7MM(0.224)

1W344

MVK10VC33RME60T

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A5C203

283-5195-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;10PF,5%,100V ,COG,1206

04222

12061A100JAT1A

A5C204

283-5007-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;8PF,+/-0.5PF,50V,NPO

04222

12061A8R0DATMA

A5C205

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A5C206

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A5C207

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A5C208

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A5C209

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A5C211

283-5195-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;10PF,5%,100V ,COG,1206

04222

12061A100JAT1A

A5C212

283-5107-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;22PF,5%,100V,NPO,1206

04222

12061A220JAT1A

A5C213

283-5107-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;22PF,5%,100V,NPO,1206

04222

12061A220JAT1A

A5C214

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A5C215

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A5C216

283-5004-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A5C217

283-5195-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;10PF,5%,100V ,COG,1206

04222

12061A100JAT1A

A5C218

283-5195-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;10PF,5%,100V ,COG,1206

04222

12061A100JAT1A

A5C219

283-5107-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;22PF,5%,100V,NPO,1206

04222

12061A220JAT1A

A5C220

283-5107-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;22PF,5%,100V,NPO,1206

04222

12061A220JAT1A

A5C221

283-5107-00

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;22PF,5%,100V,NPO,1206

04222

12061A220JAT1A

A5C223

283-5004-00 B911863

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206
(TAS455 ONLY)

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A5C223

283-5004-00 B011622

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206
(TAS465 ONLY)

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A5C224

283-5004-00 B911863

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206
(TAS455 ONLY)

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A5C224

283-5004-00 B011622

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206
(TAS465 ONLY)

04222

12063C104KAT3A

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

Name & Description

825

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Mfr.
Code

A5C225

283-5004-00 B911863

Mfr. Part No.

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206
(TAS455 ONLY)

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A5C225

283-5004-00 B011622

CAP
,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206
(TAS465 ONLY)

04222

12063C104KAT3A

A5J30

131-5344-00

CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,1 X 16,0.1 CTR

00779

1-103670-5

A5J50

131-5346-00

CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,2 X 20,0.1 CTR

00779

104338-8

A5J55

131-4807-00

CONN,HDR PWR:PCB,;MALE,STR,1 X 5,0.156 CTR

00779

640444-5

A5J204

131-3147-00

CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,2 X 25,0.1 CTR

53387

2550-6002UB

A5J205

131-5203-00

CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,1 X 2,0.1 CTR

00779

104350-1

A5Q1

151-5001-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA

04713

MMBT3904LT1

A5Q2

151-5001-00

TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA

04713

MMBT3904LT1

A5R201

321-5208-00

A5R202

321-5006-00 B010100

A5R202

321-5048-00 B010688

A5R202

321-5006-00 B010100

A5R202

321-5048-00 B010589

A5R203

Name & Description

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;10M OHM,5%,0.125W

91637

CRCW1206-106JT

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.125W


(TAS455 ONLY)
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;332K OHM,1%,0.125W
(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

321500600

57668

MCR18FXEA332K

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.125W


(TAS465 ONLY)
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;332K OHM,1%,0.125W
(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

321500600

57668

MCR18FXEA332K

321-5212-00

RES,FXD,FILM:4.99K OHM,1%,0.125W100PPM/DEG

91637

CRCW-12064991F

A5R204

321-5212-00

RES,FXD,FILM:4.99K OHM,1%,0.125W100PPM/DEG

91637

CRCW-12064991F

A5R205

321-5212-00

RES,FXD,FILM:4.99K OHM,1%,0.125W100PPM/DEG

91637

CRCW-12064991F

A5R206

321-5212-00

RES,FXD,FILM:4.99K OHM,1%,0.125W100PPM/DEG

91637

CRCW-12064991F

A5R207

307-5020-00

RES NTWK,FXD,FI:10K X 8,1%,0.250W

91637

SOMC-1603-1002F

A5R208

307-5020-00

RES NTWK,FXD,FI:10K X 8,1%,0.250W

91637

SOMC-1603-1002F

A5R209

307-5020-00

RES NTWK,FXD,FI:10K X 8,1%,0.250W

91637

SOMC-1603-1002F

A5R210

321-5010-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK221FT

A5R211

321-5007-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;121 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1210FT

A5R212

321-5010-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK221FT

A5R213

321-5007-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;121 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1210FT

A5R214

321-5010-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK221FT

A5R217

321-5010-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK221FT

A5R220

321-5000-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.125W

91637

CRCW120610R0FT

A5R221

321-5000-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.125W

91637

CRCW120610R0FT

A5R222

321-5022-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK2211FT

A5R223

321-5212-00

RES,FXD,FILM:4.99K OHM,1%,0.125W100PPM/DEG

91637

CRCW-12064991F

A5R224

321-5007-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;121 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1210FT

A5R225

321-5007-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;121 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK1210FT

A5R227

321-5029-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;8.25K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK8251FT

A5R228

321-5029-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;8.25K OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK8251FT

A5R230

321-5051-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;0 OHM,1%,0.125W

09969

CRCW1206 JUMPER

A5R231

321-5010-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK221FT

A5R232

321-5010-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK221FT

826

B010687

B010588

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

A5R233

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Name & Description

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

321-5010-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK221FT

A5R234

321-5010-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK221FT

A5R235

321-5010-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK221FT

A5R236

321-5010-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK221FT

A5R237

321-5010-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK221FT

A5R238

321-5010-00

RES,FXD:THICK FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.125W

50139

BCK221FT

A5U201

156-6298-00

IC,PROCESSOR:CMOS,MICROCONTROLLER

04713

MC68331CFC16

A5U202

156-6151-00

IC,MEMORY:CMOS,SRAM;128K X 8,100NS,15UA

TK1146

M5M51008FP-10LL

A5U203

156-6151-00

IC,MEMORY:CMOS,SRAM;128K X 8,100NS,15UA

TK1146

M5M51008FP-10LL

A5U205

156-6461-01 B010100

IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;256K X 8,150NS FLASH


(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

156646101

A5U205

156-6085-01 B011863

IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;128K X 8,200NS FLASH


(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

156646101

A5U205

156-6461-01 B010100

IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;256K X 8,150NS FLASH


(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

156646101

A5U205

156-6085-01 B011622

IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;128K X 8,200NS FLASH


(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

156646101

A5U206

156-6461-01 B010100

IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;256K X 8,150NS FLASH


(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

156646101

A5U206

156-6085-01 B011863

IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;128K X 8,200NS FLASH


(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

156646101

A5U206

156-6461-01 B010100

IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;256K X 8,150NS FLASH


(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

156646101

A5U206

156-6085-01 B011622

IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;128K X 8,200NS FLASH


(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

156646101

A5U207

156-6101-01

IC,MISC:BIPOLAR,PWR SUPPLY SUPERVISOR

04713

MC34164D-5R2

A5U208

156-4224-00

IC,MEMORY:CMOS,NVRAM;8K X 8,100NS

0B0A9

DS1225D-100

A5U215

156-6031-00

IC,PROCESSOR:NMOS,PERIPHERAL

04713

MC68681FN

A5U217

156-6325-00

IC,ASIC:CMOS,CUSTOM;CHARACTER DSPLYGEN

80009

156632500

A5U218

156-5157-01

IC,CONVERTER:BIPOLAR,D/A;12 BIT,300NS,MULTI

1CH66

AM6012DT (D/C88

A5U219

156-5157-01

IC,CONVERTER:BIPOLAR,D/A;12 BIT,300NS,MULTI

1CH66

AM6012DT (D/C88

A5U220

156-5588-01

IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VOLT REF;POSI,2.5V,1.0%

04713

MC1403D

A5U221

156-5051-01

IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,GATE;QUAD 2-INPUT NOR

04713

MC74F02DR2

A5U222

156-5054-01 B011863

IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,GATE;QUAD 2-INPUT NOR


(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

156505401

A5U222

156-5054-01 B011622

IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,GATE;QUAD 2-INPUT NOR


(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

156505401

A5U223

156-6085-01 B011863

IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;128K X 8,200NS FLASH


(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

156646101

A5U223

156-6085-01 B011622

IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;128K X 8,200NS FLASH


(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

156646101

A5U224

156-6085-01 B011863

IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;128K X 8,200NS FLASH


(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

156646101

A5U224

156-6085-01 B011622

IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;128K X 8,200NS FLASH


(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

156646101

B011862

B011621

B011862

B011621

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

827

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

A5XJ205

Name & Description

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

131-0993-00

CONN, BOX, SHUNT, FEMALE, STR,1X2,0.1 CTR

00779

530153-2

A5Y201

158-5013-00

XTAL UNIT QTZ:32.768KHZ,+/- 0.002%, RS 60K

61429

FSM327

A5Y202

158-5012-00

XTAL UNIT QTZ:3.6864MHZ,+/-0.005%,ESR 150

61429

HC49SG

828

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

A9

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Name & Description

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

259-0091-00

FLEX CIRCUIT:BEZEL

80009

259009100

A62

672-1362-00

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:FRONT PANEL MODULE


(TAS455 ONLY)

80009

672136200

A62
A62

672-1362-00 B010100
672-1362-01 B012836

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:FRONT PANEL MODULE


(TAS465 ONLY)

80009
80009

672136200
672136201

B012835

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

829

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

A64

154-0905-01

830

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Name & Description

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

ELECTRON TUBE:CRT

80009

154090501

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Component
Number

Tektronix
Part No.

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Name & Description

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

CHASSIS PARTS
B90

119-1770-04

FAN,DC:TUBEAXIAL;12V,1.72W,35CFM,W/CONN

S4246

CUDC12D4

DL68

119-5023-00

DELAY LINE,ELEC:VERTICAL

TK2469

119-5023-00

J21

174-3005-00

CA ASSY RF:DESCRETE,;SDI/RFD,22 AWG,8.625 L


(WITH P66)

0J7N9

ORDER BY DESC

P30

174-2598-00

CA ASSY,SP:FLAT FLEX,;FLX,16,26 AWG,13.7 L


(FRONT PANEL/CPU)

80009

174259800

P50

174-2600-00

CA ASSY,SP:RIBBON,;IDC,40,28 AWG,3.5 L,2X20


(CPU/ANALOG)

80009

174260000

P74

196-3374-00

LEAD,ELECTRICAL:DESCRETE,;SDI/IDC,2,22 AWG
(VERTICAL, QTY 2) TAS455 ONLY

0J7N9

196-3374-00

P74
P74

196-3374-00 B010100
196-3374-01 B013241

LEAD,ELECTRICAL:DESCRETE,;SDI/IDC,2,22 AWG
(VERTICAL, QTY 2) TAS465 ONLY

0J7N9
0J7N9

196-3374-00
196-3374-01

P75

196-3375-00

LEAD,ELECTRICAL:DESCRETE,;SDI/IDC,2,22 AWG
(HORIZ DEFL LEAD, QTY 2)TAS455 ONLY

0J7N9

196-3375-00

P75
P75

196-3375-00 B010100
196-3375-01 B011993

LEAD,ELECTRICAL:DESCRETE,;SDI/IDC,2,22 AWG
(HORIZ DEFL LEAD, QTY 2) TAS465 ONLY

0J7N9
0J7N9

196-3375-00
196-3375-01

P76

198-5790-01

CA ASSY,SP:DESCRETE,;SDI,9,24 AWG,6.5 L

0J7N9

198-5790-01

P80

174-2601-00

CA ASSY,SP:FLAT FLEX,;FLX,2,26 AWG,7.65 L


(DC/DD)

80009

174260100

P84

174-2284-00

CA ASSY,SP:FLAT FLEX,;FLX,5,26 AWG,8.7 L


(DC/FP)

80009

174228400

B013240

B011992

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

831

Replaceable Electrical Parts

832

Replaceable Electrical Parts

Diagrams and Circuit Board Illustrations


This section contains circuit board illustrations, component locator tables,
waveform illustrations, and schematic diagrams for this oscilloscope.

Symbols

Graphic symbols and class designation letters are based on ANSI Standard
Y32.21975. Abbreviations are based on ANSI Y1.11972.
Logic symbology is based on ANSI/IEEE Std 911984 in terms of positive
logic. Logic symbols depict the logic function performed and can differ from
the manufacturer data.
The tilde (~) preceding a signal name indicates that the signal performs its
intended function when in the low state.
Other standards used in the preparation of diagrams by Tektronix. Inc are:
H
H

ANSI Y14.1591971 Interconnection Diagrams

ANSI Y32.161975 Reference Designations for Electronic Equipment

Component Values

Tektronix Standard 0622476 Symbols and Practices for Schematic


Drafting

MILHDBK630381A Military Standard Technical Manual Writing Hand


book

Electrical components shown on the diagrams are in the following units


unless noted otherwise:
Capacitors:
Resistors:

Graphic Items and


Special Symbols
Used in This Manual

Values one or greater are in picofarads (pF). Values less


than one are in microfarads (mF).
Values are in Ohms (W).

Each assembly in the instrument is assigned an assembly identifier (for


example, MAIN or A5). The assembly identifier appears on the circuit board
outline on the diagram (see Figure 91), in the title for the circuit board
component location illustration, and in the lookup table for the schematic
diagram and corresponding component locator illustration. The Replaceable
Electrical Parts list is arranged by assemblies in numerical sequence; the
components are listed by component number.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

91

Diagrams and Circuit Board Illustrations

Locator Grid

Power Termination

Function Block
Title

Component on
back of board

Board Outline

Strap

Internal Screw
Adjustment
Refer to Waveform
Assembly Number

Panel
Control

Onboard Jumper
Digital Ground
Male Coaxial
Connector

Refer to Assembly
& Diagram Number

Female Coaxial
Connector

Off board
Connector

Heat Sink

Active Low
Signal
Signal From
Another Diagram,
Same Board

SYN GENERATOR A5

Decoupled
Voltage

Diagram Number
Assembly Number
Diagram Name

Assembly Number
& Board Name

Figure 91:Graphic Items and Special Symbols Used in This Manual

Component Locator
Diagrams

The schematic diagram and circuit board component location illustrations


have grids. A lookup table is provided for ease of locating a component. The
circuit board illustration only appears once; its lookup table lists the diagram
number of all diagrams that the circuitry appears on.
Some of the circuit board component location illustrations are expanded and
divided into several parts to make it easier for you to locate small compo
nents. To determine which part of the whole locator diagram you are looking
at, refer to the small locator key positioned at the upper left of each circuit
board component locator diagram, as shown in Figure 92. The gray block,
within the larger circuit board outline, shows where that part fits in the whole
locator diagram. Each part in the key is labeled with an identifying letter
which appears in the figure titles under component locator diagrams.

Section of Circuit
Board Shown

Figure 92:Circuit Board Component Locator Diagram Key

92

Diagrams

Replaceable Mechanical Parts


This section contains a list of the components that are replaceable for the
TAS 455 and TAS 465 Analog Oscilloscopes. As described below, use this
list to identify and order replacement parts. There is a separate Replaceable
Parts List for each instrument.

Parts Ordering
Information

Replacement parts are available from or through your local Tektronix, Inc.,
service center or representative.
Changes to Tektronix instruments are sometimes made to accommodate
improved components as they become available and to give you the benefit
of the latest circuit improvements. Therefore, when ordering parts, it is
important to include the following information in your order:
H

Part number

Instrument type or model number

Instrument serial number

Instrument modification number, if applicable

If a part you order has been replaced with a different or improved part, your
local Tektronix service center or representative will contact you concerning
any change in the part number.

Using the
Replaceable Parts
List

The tabular information in the Replaceable Parts List is arranged for quick
retrieval. Understanding the structure and features of the list will help you
find all the information you need for ordering replacement parts.

Item Names
In the Replaceable Parts List, an Item Name is separated from the descrip
tion by a colon (:). Because of space limitations, an Item Name may some
times appear as incomplete. For further Item Name identification, U.S.
Federal Cataloging Handbook H61 can be used where possible.

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

101

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

Indentation System
This parts list is indented to show the relationship between items. The
following example is of the indentation system used in the Description
column:
1 2 3 4 5

Name & Description

Assembly and/or Component


Attaching parts for Assembly and/or Component
(END ATTACHING PARTS)
Detail Part of Assembly and/or Component
Attaching parts for Detail Part
(END ATTACHING PARTS)
Parts of Detail Part
Attaching parts for Parts of Detail Part
(END ATTACHING PARTS)
Attaching parts always appear at the same indentation as the item it
mounts, while the detail parts are indented to the right. Indented items are
part of, and included with, the next higher indentation. Attaching parts must
be purchased separately, unless otherwise specified.

Abbreviations
Abbreviations conform to American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
standard Y1.1

102

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

CROSS INDEX - MFR. CODE NUMBER TO MANUFACTURER


Mfr.
Code

Manufacturer

Address

City, State, Zip Code

S3109

FELLER

72 VERONICA AVE UNIT 4

SUMMERSET NJ 08873

S4246

JAPAN SERVO CO LTD

7 KANDA
MITOSHIRO-CHO CHIYODA-KU

TOKYO JAPAN

TK0860

LABEL GRAPHICS

6700 SW BRADBURY CT

PORTLAND OR 97224

TK1149

ALMAN INC

97 THORNWOOD RD

STAMFORD CT 06903-2617

TK1159

IMPROVED PRODUCTS

3400 OLYMPIC STREET

SPRINGFIELD OR 97477

TK1163

POLYCAST INC

9898 SW TIGARD ST

TIGARD OR 97223

TK1326

NORTHWEST FOURSLIDE INC

18224 SW 100TH CT

TUALATIN OR 97062

TK1908

PLASTIC MOLDED PRODUCTS

4336 SO ADAMS

TACOMA WA 98409

TK1918

SHIN-ETSU POLYMER AMERICA INC

1181 NORTH 4TH ST

SAN JOSE CA 95112

TK1935

ACCRA-FAB INC

11007 NE 37TH CIRCLE

VANCOUVER WA 98682

TK2045

ITW CHRONOMATIC

4126 N NASHVILLE AVE

CHIGAGO IL 60634

TK2280

ESCORT INSTRUMENTS CORP

2-FL NO 37 POA HSIN RD


PO BOX 3-20 MUCHA

TAIPEI TAIWAN ROC 00080

TK2432

UNION ELECTRIC

15/F #1, FU-SHING N. ROAD

TAIPEI, TAIWAN ROC

TK2469

UNITREK CORPORATION

3000 LEWIS & CLARK WAY


SUITE #2

VANCOUVER WA 98601

TK6056

ASTEK USA

2880 SAN TOMES EXPRESSWAY


SUITE 200

SANTA CLARA CA 95051

0JR05

TRIQUEST CORP

3000 LEWIS AND CLARK HWY

VANCOUVER WA 98661-2999

0J7N9

MCX INC

30608 SAN ANTONIO ST

HAYWARD CA 94544

0J9P9

GEROME MFG CO INC

PO BOX 737

NEWBERG OR 97132

0KBZ5

MORELLIS Q & D PLASTICS

1812 16TH AVE

FOREST GROVE OR 97116

0KB00

SCHRAMM PLASTIC FABRICATIORS

7885 SW HUNZIKER

TIGARD OR 97223

0KB01

STAUFFER SUPPLY

810 SE SHERMAN

PORTLAND OR 97214

05469

BEARINGS INC

3634 EUCLID P O BOX 6925

CLEVELAND OH 44101

07416

NELSON NAME PLATE CO

3191 CASITAS

LOS ANGELES CA 90039-2410

13103

THERMALLOY CO INC

2021 W VALLEY VIEW LN


PO BOX 810839

DALLAS TX 75381

24931

SPECIALTY CONNECTOR CO INC

2100 EARLYWOOD DR
PO BOX 547

FRANKLIN IN 46131

30817

INSTRUMENT SPECIALTIES CO INC

EXIT 53 RT 80 BOX A

DELAWARE WATER GAP PA 18327

52152

MINNESOTA MINING AND MFG CO


INDUSTRIAL SPECIALTIES DIV

3M CENTER

ST PAUL MN 55144-0001

55335

JKL COMPONENTS CORP

13343 PAXTON STREET

PACOIMA CA 91331

70903

COOPER BELDEN ELECTRONICS WIRE


AND CABLE
SUB OF COOPER INDUSTRIES INC

73743

FISCHER SPECIAL MFG CO

111 INDUSTRIAL RD

COLD SPRING KY 41076-9749

75915

LITTELFUSE INC
SUB TRACOR INC

800 E NORTHWEST HWY

DES PLAINES IL 60016-3049

80009

TEKTRONIX INC

14150 SW KARL BRAUN DR


PO BOX 500

BEAVERTON OR 97077-0001

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

103

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

Fig. &
Index
No.

Tektronix
Part No.

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Qty

Mfr.
Code

12345 Name & Description

Mfr. Part No.

390-1106-01

CABINET,OSC:ALUMINUM

TK1935

ORDER BY DESC

-2

367-0356-01

HANDLE,CARRYING:13.855,SST,

0JR05

ORDER BY DESC

-3

212-0144-00

SCREW,TPG,TF:8-16 X 0.562 L,PLASTI,SPCL HD

0KB01

ORDER BY DESC

-4

348-0659-00

FOOT,CABINET:BLACK POLYURETHANE

0JR05

ORDER BY DESC

-5

--------

CABINET,OSC:ALUMINUM
(NOT REPL, ORDER 390-1106-XX)

-6

211-0730-00

SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.375,PNH,STL CD PL 0KB01

ORDER BY DESC

-7

334-8203-00

MARKER,IDENT:MKD REAR COVER SUPPLY INFO

80009

334820300

-8

159-0277-00

FUSE,CARTRIDGE:5 X 20MM,3A,250V,5 SEC


(STANDARD)

75915

235003

159-0311-00

FUSE,CARTRIDGE:METRIC,1.5A,250V,FAST
(OPTIONS A1,A2,A3,A4,A5)

TK2280

62-25608-1U

-9

211-0691-00

SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.625,PNH,STL

0KB01

ORDER BY DESC

-10

334-8494-00

MARKER,IDENT:MKD

80009

334849400

-11

200-3971-01

COVER,REAR:W/FEET AND LABLES

TK1163

200-3971-01

-12

161-0230-01

CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,18 AWG,92 L,SVT,TAN


(STANDARD ACCESSORY)

TK2432

ORDER BY DESC

-13

343-1213-00

CLAMP
,PWR CORD:POLYMIDE
(STANDARD ACCESSORY)

TK1163

ORDER BY DESC

101-1

104

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

6
1
5
4
3
2

10
11

12
13

Figure 101:Cabinet and Rear

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

105

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

Fig. &
Index
No.
10-2-1

Tektronix
Part No.

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Qty

200-3232-00 B010100 B010799 1


200-3232-01 B010800

200-3232-00 B010100 B010674 1

Mfr.
Code

12345 Name & Description

Mfr. Part No.

COVER,FRONT:ABS
(TAS455 ONLY)
COVER,FRONT:ASB
(TAS455 ONLY)
COVER,FRONT:ABS
(TAS465 ONLY)
COVER,FRONT:ASB
(TAS465 ONLY)

TK1908

ORDER BY DESC

TK1908

ORDER BY DESC

TK1908

ORDER BY DESC

TK1908

ORDER BY DESC

MARKER,IDENT:MKD INST NOMENCLATURE


(TAS 455 ONLY)
MARKER,IDENT:MKD INST NOMENCLATURE
(TAS 465 ONLY)

80009

334842000

80009

334820400

200-3232-01 B010675

334-8420-00

334-8204-00

-3

101-0135-00

TRIM.DECORATIVE:

80009

101013500

-4

378-0199-03

FILTER,LT,CRT:BLUE,3.415 X 4.105 X 0.030THK

0KB00

378019903

-5

260-2561-00

SWITCH,PB:BEZEL

80009

260256100

-6

--------

FLEX CIRCUIT:BEZEL
(SEE A9 REPL)

-7

--------

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:FRONT PANEL


(SEE A4 REPL)

-8

260-2538-00

SWITCH SET:IMPLICT

TK1918

ORDER BY DESC

-9

214-1126-01

SPRING,FLAT:0.7 X 0.125,CU BE GOLD CLR

80009

214112601

-10

214-0274-00

BALL,BEARING:0.125 DIA,SST,GRADE 100

05469

ORDER BY DESC

-11

105-1031-00

ACTUATOR SW AS:12 POSITION

TK2045

ORDER BY DESC

-12

131-5341-00

CONTACT,ELEC:ESD,CU-BE ALLOY

TK1326

ORDER BY DESC

-13

366-2163-00

16

PUSH BUTTON:IVORY GRAY,OVAL

80009

366216300

-14

--------

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:FRONT PANEL MODULE


(SEE A62 REPL)

80009

672136200

-15

380-0990-00

HOUSING,FR PNL:

80009

380099000

-16

333-3960-00

PANEL,FRONT:PLASTIC,Q1,Q1/2

80009

333396000

-17

384-1689-01

SHAFT EXTENDER:ACETAL

80009

384168901

-18

366-2111-00

KNOB:SMALL,FLUTED

TK1163

ORDER BY DESC

-19

131-5142-00

CONTACT,ELEC:PROBE ADJUST

TK1935

ORDER BY DESC

-20

366-2113-00

KNOB:MEDIUM,DETENTED

TK1163

ORDER BY DESC

-21

366-2164-00

10

PUSH BUTTON:SMOKE TAN

80009

366216400

-2

106

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

A9

5
4
3
2
1

A4

15

13

12

11

10

16
17
19

18

14

A62

20
21

Figure 102:Front Panel Assembly

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

107

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

108

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

Fig. &
Index
No.
10-3-1
-2

Tektronix
Part No.

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

337-2926-03

Qty
1

407-4130-00 B010100 B011875 1


407-4130-01 B011876

407-4130-00 B010100 B011639 1

12345 Name & Description

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

SHLD,IMPLOSION:4.44 X 3.67 X 0.06,CLEAR

TK1159

ORDER BY DESC

BRACKET,CRT:FRONT
(TAS455 ONLY)
BRACKET,CRT:FRONT
(TAS455 ONLY)
BRACKET,CRT:FRONT
(TAS465 ONLY)
BRACKET,CRT:FRONT
(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

407413000

80009

407413001

80009

407413000

80009

407413001

407-4130-01 B011640

-3

348-1474-00

GASKET; DUST SEAL


(TAS465 ONLY)

80009

348147400

-4

348-0660-00

CUSHION,CRT:POLYURETHANE

80009

348066000

-5

--------

ELECTRON TUBE:CRT
(SEE A64 REPL)

-6

344-0347-00

CLIP
,ELECTRICAL:ANODE,0.72OD,NYLON

80009

344034700

-7

386-4443-00

SUPPORT,SHIELD:CRT,FRONT,PLASTIC

80009

386444300

-8

--------

LEAD,ELECTRICAL:DESCRETE,SDI/IDC,2,22 AWG
(SEE P75 REPL)

-9

--------

LEAD,ELECTRICAL:DESCRETE,SDI/IDC,2,22 AWG
(SEE P74 REPL)

-10

334-1951-00

MARKER,IDENT:MKD WARNING,CRT VOLTAGES

TK0860

ORDER BY DESC

-11

334-1379-00

MARKER,IDENT:MKD HI VACUUM

07416

ORDER BY DESC

-12

337-3487-00

SHIELD,ELEC:CRT,STL

0J9P9

337348700

-13

426-2426-00

FRAME,FAN MTG:POLYCARBONATE

TK1163

426-2426-00

-14

--------

FAN,TUBEAXIAL:12V,1.72W,42 CFM
(SEE B90 REPL)

-15

200-0616-00 B010100 B010363 1

80009

200061600

80009

200061602

80009

200061600

80009

200061602

80009

131554600

200-0616-02 B010364

200-0616-00 B010100 B010349 1

COVER,CRT SKT:1.78 DIA X 0.2 D,WHITEPOLY


(TAS455 ONLY)
COVER,CRT SKT:1.78 DIA X 0.2 D,WHITEPOLY
(TAS455 ONLY)
COVER,CRT SKT:1.78 DIA X 0.2 D,WHITEPOLY
(TAS465 ONLY)
COVER,CRT SKT:1.78 DIA X 0.2 D,WHITEPOLY
(TAS465 ONLY)

200-0616-02 B010350

-16

--------

CA ASSY,SP:DESCETE,SDI,9,26 AWG,7.4L
(SEE P76 REPL)

-17

131-5546-00

CONN,CONTACT:STATIC

-18

407-4129-00

BRACKET,REAR:REAR OUT

80009

407412900

-19

213-0882-00

17

SCREW,TPG,TR:6-32 X 0.437 TAPTITE,PNH,STL

0KB01

ORDER BY DESC

-20

--------

POWER SUPPLY:LOW POWER VERSION


(SEE A63 REPL)

-21

343-0549-00 B010903

TK1499

HW-047

343-0549-00 B010773

STRAP
,TIEDOWN,E:0.098W X 4.0L
(TAS455 ONLY)
STRAP
,TIEDOWN,E:0.098W X 4.0L
(TAS465 ONLY)

TK1499

HW-047

-22

--------

CA ASSY RF:DESCRETE,;SDI/RFD,22 AWG,8.625 L


(SEE J21 REPL)

-23

407-4196-00

BRACKET,STD:ALUMINUM

80009

407419600

-24

441-1982-00

CHASSIS ASSY:ALUMINUM

80009

441198200

-25

348-0150-00

GROMMET,PLASTIC:DK GRAY,U-SHAPE,0.66 ID

0KBZ5

ORDER BY DESC

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

109

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

Fig. &
Index
No.

Tektronix
Part No.

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Qty

12345 Name & Description

SHLD,GSKT ELEK:CLIP ON EMI,0.46 L


(TAS455 ONLY)
SHLD,GSKT ELEK:CLIP ON EMI,0.46 L
(TAS465 ONLY)

-26

348-1334-00 B010100

-26

348-1334-00 B010100 B021145 1

1010

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

30817

97-605-09-005W

30817

97-605-09-005W

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

Fig. &
Index
No.

Tektronix
Part No.

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

10-3-27 384-1370-00

Qty

12345 Name & Description

Mfr.
Code

Mfr. Part No.

EXTENSION SHAFT:4.68 L,MOLDED PLASTIC

0JR05

ORDER BY DESC

-28

366-2168-00

PUSH BUTTON:ON/OFF

80009

366216800

-29

351-0914-00

GUIDE,LIGHT:GRATICULE

80009

351091400

-30

384-1689-01

SHAFT EXTENDER:ACETAL

80009

384168901

-31

366-2169-00

KNOB:THUMBWHEEL

80009

366216900

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

1011

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

13
14

15

12

10

16

11

17
18

8
7

A64
4

19

6
5

20

A63

3
21

22

19

23

30

29

31

24
19

25
28
26
27

19

Figure 103:Chassis

1012

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

Fig. &
Index
No.

Tektronix
Part No.

10-4-1

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Mfr.
Code

Qty

12345 Name & Description

--------

LAMP
,INCAND:14V,0.08A,WEDGE BASE,T1.75
(SEE A2DS1,DS2 REPL)

-2

196-3405-00

LEAD,ELECTRICAL:4.0L,W/AMPRING TERMINAL

80009

196340500

-3

210-0457-00

NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:6.32 X 0.312,STL CD PL

OKB01

ORDER BY DESC

-4

334-8543-00

MARKER,IDENT:0.500 IN DIA BLANK MYLAR

80009

334854300

-5

213-0882-00

SCREW,TPG,TR:6-32 X 0.437 TAPTITE,PNH,STL

0KB01

ORDER BY DESC

-6

--------

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
(SEE A5 REPL)

-7

--------

DELAY LINE,ELEC:VERTICAL
(SEE DL68 REPL)

-8

--------

CA ASSY, SP:FLAT FLEX,FLX,23,26 AWG,6.5L


(SEE A3W66 REPL)

-9

342-0960-00

INSULATOR,SHEET:POLYCARBONATE

80009

342096000

-10

337-3880-00

SHIELD,ELEC:PLASTIC,HIGHT VOLTAGE

80009

337388000

-11

334-0286-00

LABEL:MKD ASMZ80 OPT 1C

80009

334028600

-12

--------

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY DRIVER


(SEE A3 REPL)

-13

342-0324-00

INSULATOR,DISK:TRANSISTOR,NYLON

13103

7717-5N

-14

214-2593-00

HEAT SINK,XSTR:TO-5,AL

13103

2257B

-15

337-3904-00

SHIELD,ELEC:CIRCUIT BOARD,TSA465

TK1326

337-3904-00

-16

386-0048-00

SUPPORT,CHASSIS:BRASS W/NICKLE PLATING

80009

386004800

-17

407-4131-00

BRACKET,ATTEN:BNC,BRASS

80009

407413100

-18

337-3713-01

SHIELD,ELEC:ATTENUATOR

TK1935

337-3713-01

-19

--------

CONN,RF JACK:BNC,50 OHM,FEMALE,STR


(SEE A1J10,11,20,21 REPL)

-20

210-1039-00

WASHER,LOCK:0.521 ID,INT,0.025 THK,SST

0KB01

1224-02-00-0541

-21

220-0497-00

NUT,PLAIN,HEX:0.5-28 X 0.562 HEX,BRS CD PL

73743

ORDER BY DESC

-22

--------

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG
(SEE A1 REPL)

-23

343-0775-00 B012359

52152

3484-1000

343-0775-00 B011891

CABLE,CLAMP:RIBBON,1.0 X 1.0,GRAY POLY


(TAS455 ONLY)
CABLE,CLAMP:RIBBON,1.0 X 1.0,GRAY POLY
(TAS465 ONLY)

52152

3484-1000

-24

--------

CA ASSY,SP:FLAT FLEX,;FLX,16,26 AWG,13.7 L


(SEE P30 REPL)

-25

--------

CA ASSY,SP:RIBBON,;IDC,40,28 AWG,3.5 L,2X2


(SEE P50 REPL)

-26

--------

CA ASSY,SP:FLAT FLEX,;FLX,2,26 AWG,7.65 L


(SEE P80 REPL)

-27

--------

CA ASSY,SP:FLAT FLEX,;FLX,5,26 AWG,8.7 L


(SEE P84 REPL)

-28

--------

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY CONTROL


(SEE A2 REPL)

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

Mfr. Part No.

1013

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

2
3
4

A2
28

27

26
25
24

23

A5

A1

10

22
21
20

16
19

11

15

14

13

12

A3

11

17
18

Figure 104:Circuit Boards

1014

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

Fig. &
Index
No.

Tektronix
Part No.

10-5-1

Serial No.
Effective Dscont

Mfr.
Code

Qty

12345 Name & Description

Mfr. Part No.

161-0104-05

CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,18 AWG,240V,98.0 L


(OPTION A3-AUSTRALIAN)

S3109

SAA/3-OD3CCFC3X

5-2

161-0104-06

CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3 X 0.75MM SQ,220V,98.0 L


(OPTION A1-EUROPEAN)

S3109

VIIGSOPO-HO5VVF

5-3

161-0104-07

CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,1.0MM SQ,240 VOLT,2.5 M


(OPTION A2-UNITED KINGDOM)

S3109

ORDER BY DESC

5-4

161-0104-08

CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,18 AWG,98 L,SVT,GREY/BLK


(OPTION A4-NORTH AMERICAN)

70903

ORDER BY DESC

5-5

161-0167-00

CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3.0 X 0.75,6A,240V,2.5M L


(OPTION A5-SWITZERLAND)

S3109

ORDER BY DESC

--------

CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,18 AWG,92 L,SVT,TAN


(STANDARD, SEE FIGURE 10-1-15)

--------

ACCESSORY PKG:(2)P6109B 2M PROBES W/ACC

070-8522-XX

MANUAL,TECH:TAS455,TAS465 REF

80009

0708522XX

070-8523-XX

MANUAL,TECH:INSTRUCTION,MODULE LEVEL

80009

0708523XX

070-8690-XX

MANUAL,TECH:USER,XYZS OF OSCILLOSCOPE

80009

0708690XX

--------

FUSE,CARTRIDGE:5 X 20MM,3A,250V,5 SEC


(SEE FIGURE 10-1-9)

--------

FUSE,CARTRIDGE:METRIC,1.5A,250V,FAST
(OPTIONS A1, A2, A3, A4, A5) (SEE FIG. 10-1-10)

--------

CLAMP
,PWR CORD:POLYMIDE
(SEE FIGURE 10-1-16)

003-1472-00

HAND TOOL:CLAMP
,DETENT SPRING

80009

003147200

003-1473-00

HAND TOOL:SPRING INSERTION

80009

003147300

070-8524-XX

MANUAL,TECH:SERVICE,COMPONENT LEVEL

80009

0708524XX

016-1154-00

HOOD ASSEMBLY:2KDSO

80009

016115400

016-1166-00

RACK MOUNT KIT:TAS SERIES

80009

016116600

STANDARD ACCESSORIES

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

Figure 105:Accessories

TAS 455 and TAS 465 Service Manual

1015

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

1016

Replaceable Mechanical Parts

You might also like